JOB-ORDER COSTING AND OVERHEAD APPLICATION

1. Job-order costing accumulates costs by jobs, and process costing accumulates costs by
processes. Job-order costing is suitable for operations that produce custom-made products that
receive different doses of manufacturing costs. Process costing, on the other hand, is suitable
for operations that produce homogeneous products that receive equal amounts of manufacturing
costs in each process.
2. Job-order costing is appropriate for many service firms. The key factor is that differing amounts
of resources must be used for different jobs. Examples of service firms that use job-order
costing are law firms, accounting firms, dental offices, automobile repair shops, and architectural
firms. The key point is that the costs of each job are unique to the job and must be tracked by job.
3. Normal costing defines product cost as the sum of actual direct materials, actual direct labor,
and applied overhead. The difference between actual costing and normal costing lies in the
treatment of overhead. Actual costing uses actual overhead; normal costing uses applied
overhead.
4. Actual overhead rates are rarely used because managers cannot wait until the end of the year
to obtain product costs. Information on product costs is needed as the year unfolds for planning,
control, and decision making.
5. Overhead is assigned to production using the predetermined rate. The predetermined overhead
rate is equal to estimated overhead divided by estimated activity level. The predetermined
overhead rate is multiplied by the actual activity level or the cost driver on which the rate is based.
6. Underapplied overhead means that the applied overhead is less than the actual overhead. As a
result, the unadjusted cost of goods is too small (because too little overhead has been applied).
So, Cost of Goods Sold will increase by the amount of underapplied overhead.
7. Overapplied overhead means that the applied overhead is more than the actual overhead. As a
result, the unadjusted cost of goods is too large (because too much overhead has been applied).
So, Cost of Goods Sold will decrease by the amount of overapplied overhead.
8. Unless all your jobs (lawns) are the same size and require the same services, you will need to
use a job-order costing system. At a minimum, you will need job-order cost sheets for each
customer. You will need labor time tickets to record the amount of time spent on each job, both
to cost the job and to pay the individual doing the work. A materials requisition form may be
needed if fertilizer or weed control products are used (alternatively, it may be possible to just list
the amount of product used directly on the job-order cost sheet). The more complicated your
business becomes (e.g., mowing, trimming, fertilizing, trimming shrubbery, planting shrubs and
trees), the more source documents will be needed to keep track of time, materials, and use of
capital equipment (e.g., trimmers, brush hogs). Basically, as the business grows, the need for
more formal accounting and source documentation grows.
4 JOB-ORDER COSTING AND
OVERHEAD APPLICATION
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
4-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
9. Multiple overhead rates often produce a more accurate assignment of overhead costs to jobs.
This can be true if the departments through which products pass have different amounts of
overhead and if the various products spend differing amounts of time in the departments. For
example, a company may have two departments, but some products only go through one
department. It would be more accurate to assign less overhead cost to the products using only
one department. This can be easily accomplished using departmental overhead rates.
10. Materials requisition forms serve as the source document for posting materials usage and costs
to individual jobs. Time tickets serve a similar function for labor. Predetermined overhead rates
are used to assign overhead costs to individual jobs.
11. Because the overhead rate is based on direct labor cost, the amount of overhead applied will
increase. As a result, the total cost of each job will go up.
12. The overhead variance is the difference between applied overhead and actual overhead.
Typically, that variance is relatively small, and it is closed to Cost of Goods Sold. If overhead is
underapplied, the variance is added to Cost of Goods Sold. If overhead is overapplied, the
variance is subtracted from Cost of Goods Sold.
13. The cost of a job is often strongly related to the price charged. Logically enough, the higher the
cost of the job, the higher the price charged to the customer. This relationship makes sense not
only to the business but also to the customer. By comparing the cost of the individual job with the
price charged, the firm can determine the profit attributable to each job. Then, the firm can decide
whether the profit is sufficient to continue offering the product or service under the current terms.
14. Because advertising expense is a period expense, it has no effect on overhead—either applied or
actual. Therefore, changes in advertising expense cannot affect manufacturing cost or cost of
goods sold.
15. A departmental overhead rate application can be easily converted to a plantwide rate. First, the
estimated overhead for all departments is totaled, and a single plantwide driver is chosen. The
plantwide overhead rate is simply the estimated plantwide overhead divided by the plantwide
driver. When overhead is applied, the predetermined plantwide rate is multiplied by the actual
amount of driver used in the factory.
16. Producing departments work directly on the products and services being made, whereas support
departments provide indirect support to the producing departments.
17. Without any allocation of support department costs, users may view services as a free good and
consume more of the service than is optimal. Allocating support department costs would
encourage managers to use the service until such time as the marginal cost of the service is
equal to the marginal benefit.
4-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
18. The identification and use of causal factors ensures that support department costs are accurately
assigned to users. This increases the legitimacy of the control function and enhances
product-costing accuracy.
19. a. Number of employees
b. Square footage
c. Pounds of laundry
d. Orders processed
e. Maintenance hours worked
f. Number of employees
g. Number of transactions processed
20. The direct method allocates the direct costs of each support department directly to the producing
departments. No consideration is given to the fact that other support departments may use support
services. The sequential method allocates support department costs sequentially. First, the costs
of the center providing the greatest service to all user departments, including other support
departments, are allocated. Next, the costs of the second greatest provider of services are
allocated to all user departments, excluding any department(s) that has already allocated costs.
This continues until all support department costs have been allocated. The principal difference in
the two methods is the fact that the sequential method considers some interactions among
support departments and the direct method ignores interactions.
4-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
4-1. d
4-2. c
4-3. a
4-4. b
4-5. b
4-6. a
4-7. a
4-8. e
4-9. a
4-10. b
4-11. c
4-12. e
4-13. d
Direct materials……………………………………… $17,500
Direct labor…………………………………………… 10,000
Applied overhead ($5 × 500 DLH)………………… 2,500
Total job cost……………………………………… $30,000
÷ Number of units………………………………… 1,000
Unit cost………………………………………………… $ 30
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
4-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
4-14. c
4-15. b
4-16. b
4-17. d
4-18. e
4-19. d
4-20. a
4-21. c
4-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-22
1. Predetermined Overhead Rate =
= $416,000/$520,000
= 0.80, or 80% of direct labor cost
2. Overhead Applied to December Production = 0.80 × $43,700 = $34,960
BE 4-23
1. Applied Overhead = Overhead Rate × Actual Direct Labor Cost
= 0.80 × $532,000 = $425,600
Actual overhead………………………………………………… $423,600
Applied overhead……………………………………………… 425,600
Overhead variance…………………………………………… $ 2,000 overapplied
2. Unadjusted cost of goods sold……………………………… $1,890,000
Less: Overapplied overhead………………………………… (2,000)
Adjusted cost of goods sold………………………………… $1,888,000
BE 4-24
1. Cutting Department Overhead Rate = $240,000/150,000 mhrs
= $1.60 per machine hour
Sewing Department Overhead Rate = $350,000/100,000 DLH
= $3.50 per direct labor hour
2. Overhead Applied to Cutting in June = $1.60 × 13,640 = $21,824
Overhead Applied to Sewing in June = $3.50 × 8,600 = $30,100
3.
Actual overhead…………… $20,610 $35,750
Less: Applied
overhead…………………… 21,824 30,100
Overhead variance………… $ 1,214 overapplied $ 5,650 underapplied
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET A
Department
Cutting Sewing
Estimated Direct Labor Cost
Department
Estimated Overhead
4-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-25
1. Predetermined Plantwide Overhead Rate = $590,000/131,200 DLH
= $4.50 per direct labor hour*
* Rounded
2. = $4.50 × 11,400 = $51,300
3. = Applied Overhead – Actual Overhead
= $51,300 – $56,360
= $5,060 underapplied
BE 4-26
1. Since the predetermined overhead rate is not given, it must be calculated from
BWIP amounts using either Job 44 or Job 45. Using Job 44,
=
= $780/$1,200
= 0.650, or 65.0%
(The predetermined overhead rate using Job 45 is identical.)
2. Job 45 Job 46 Job 47
Beginning balance, June 1……… $ 6,450 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials…………………… 7,110 1,800 1,700
Direct labor………………………… 6,400 900 560
Applied overhead………………… 4,160 585 364
Total, June 30……………………… $24,120 $3,285 $2,624
3. By the end of June, Jobs 44, 45, and 47 have been transferred out of Work in
Process. Thus, the ending balance in Work in Process consists of Job 46.
Work in process, June 30…………… $3,285
While three jobs (44, 45, and 47) were transferred out of Work in Process and into
Finished Goods during June, only two jobs remain (Jobs 44 and 47).
Finished goods, June 1………………
Job 44……………………………………
Job 47……………………………………
Finished goods, June 30………………
4. One job, Job 45, was sold during June.
Cost of goods sold……………………
Overhead Applied in June
Overhead Variance
Job 44
Predetermined Overhead Rate Applied Overhead
Direct Labor Cost
$10,900
$ 7,080
2,500
800
520
$ 0
1 0,900
2,624
$13,524
$24,120
4-7
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-27
1. Allocation ratios for S1 based on number of employees:
Cutting = 63/(63 + 147) = 0.30
Sewing = 147/(63 + 147) = 0.70
Allocation ratios for S2 based on number of maintenance hours:
Cutting = 16,000/(16,000 + 4,000) = 0.80
Sewing = 4,000/(16,000 + 4,000) = 0.20
2.
Allocate: S1 S2 Cutting Sewing
Direct costs…………………… $ 180,000 $ 150,000 $122,000 $ 90,500
S1…………………………… (180,000) — 54,000 126,000
S2…………………………… — (150,000) 120,000 30,000
Total…………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $296,000 $246,500
BE 4-28
1. Allocation ratios for S1 based on number of employees:
S2 = 30/(30 + 63 + 147) = 0.1250
Cutting = 63/(30 + 63 + 147) = 0.2625
Sewing = 147/(30 + 63 + 147) = 0.6125
Allocation ratios for S2 based on number of maintenance hours:
Cutting = 16,000/(16,000 + 4,000) = 0.8000
Sewing = 4,000/(16,000 + 4,000) = 0.2000
2. Support Departments Producing Departments
Allocate: S1 S2 Cutting Sewing
Direct costs…………………… $ 180,000 $ 150,000 $122,000 $ 90,500
S1…………………………… (180,000) 22,500 47,250 110,250
S2…………………………… — (172,500) 138,000 34,500
Total…………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $307,250 $235,250
Support Departments Producing Departments
4-8
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-29
1. Predetermined Overhead Rate =
= $450,000/$600,000
= 0.75, or 75% of direct labor cost
2. Overhead Applied to December Production = 0.75 × $46,300 = $34,725
BE 4-30
1. Applied Overhead = Overhead Rate × Actual Direct Labor Cost
= 0.75 × $532,000 = $399,000
Actual overhead………………………………………… $412,600
Applied overhead………………………………………… 399,000
Overhead variance……………………………………… $ 13,600 underapplied
2. Unadjusted cost of goods sold…………………………$1,670,000
Add: Underapplied overhead…………………………… 13,600
Adjusted cost of goods sold…………………………… $1,683,600
BE 4-31
1. Firing Department Overhead Rate = $405,000/90,000 kiln hours
= $4.50 per kiln hour
Polishing Department Overhead Rate = $110,000/100,000 DLH
= $1.10 per direct labor hour
2. Overhead Applied to Firing in July = $4.50 × 7,400 = $33,300
Overhead Applied to Polishing in July = $1.10 × 8,600 = $9,460
3.
Actual overhead……… $34,000 $9,370
Less: Applied
overhead……………… 33,300 9,460
Overhead variance…… $ 700 underapplied $ 90 overapplied
Department Department
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET B
Estimated Overhead
Estimated Direct Labor Cost
Firing Polishing
4-9
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-32
1. Predetermined Plantwide Overhead Rate = $515,000/128,750 DLH
= $4.00 per direct labor hour
2. = $4.00 × 10,950 = $43,800
3. = Applied Overhead – Actual Overhead
= $43,800 – $43,370
= $430 overapplied
BE 4-33
1. Since the predetermined overhead rate is not given, it must be calculated from
BWIP amounts using either Job 86 or Job 87. Using Job 86,
=
= $888/$1,200
= 0.740, or 74.0%
(The predetermined overhead rate using Job 87 is identical.)
2. Job 87 Job 88 Job 89
Beginning balance, March 1… $ 6,820 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials……………… 7,000 2,100 1,500
Direct labor…………………… 6,000 900 500
Applied overhead……………… 4,440 666 370
Total, March 31………………… $24,260 $3,666 $2,370
3. By the end of March, Jobs 86, 87, and 89 have been transferred out of Work in
Process. Thus, the ending balance in Work in Process consists of Job 88.
Work in process, March 31……… $3,666
While three jobs (86, 87, and 89) were transferred out of Work in Process and into
Finished Goods during March, only two jobs remain (Jobs 86 and 89).
Finished goods, March 1…………
Job 86………………………………
Job 89………………………………
Finished goods, March 31………
4. One job, Job 87, was sold during March.
Cost of goods sold………………
$ 0
11,280
2,370
$13,650
$24,260
Predetermined Overhead Rate Applied Overhead
Overhead Applied in July
Overhead Variance
$11,280
Direct Labor Cost
Job 86
$ 6,888
3,000
800
592
4-10
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
BE 4-34
1. Allocation ratios for S1 based on square footage:
Assembly = 1,875/(1,875 + 625) = 0.75
Painting = 625/(1,875 + 625) = 0.25
Allocation ratios for S2 based on number of machine hours:
Assembly = 3,200/(3,200 + 12,800) = 0.20
Painting = 12,800/(3,200 + 12,800) = 0.80
2.
Allocate: S1 S2 Assembly Painting
Direct costs…………………… $ 200,000 $ 140,000 $115,000 $ 96,000
S1…………………………… (200,000) — 150,000 50,000
S2…………………………… — (140,000) 28,000 112,000
Total…………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $293,000 $258,000
BE 4-35
1. Allocation ratios for S1 based on square footage:
S2 = 500/(500 + 1,875 + 625) = 0.1667
Assembly = 1,875/(500 + 1,875 + 625) = 0.6250
Painting = 625/(500 + 1,875 + 625) = 0.2083
Allocation ratios for S2 based on number of machine hours:
Assembly = 3,200/(3,200 + 12,800) = 0.2000
Painting = 12,800/(3,200 + 12,800) = 0.8000
2. Support Departments Producing Departments
Allocate: S1 S2 Assembly Painting
Direct costs…………………… $ 200,000 $ 140,000 $115,000 $ 96,000
S1…………………………… (200,000) 33,340 125,000 41,660
S2…………………………… — (173,340) 34,668 138,672
Total…………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $274,668 $276,332
Support Departments Producing Departments
4-11
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-36
a. Hospital services—job-order
b. Custom cabinet making—job-order
c. Toy manufacturing—process
d. Soft-drink bottling—process
e. Airplane manufacturing (e.g., 767s)—job-order
f. Personal computer assembly—process
g. Furniture making—process
h. Custom furniture making—job-order
i. Dental services—job-order
j. Paper manufacturing—process
k. Nut and bolt manufacturing—process
l. Auto repair—job order
m. Architectural services—job-order
n. Landscape design services—job-order
o. Flashlight manufacturing—process
E 4-37
The following are examples; answers may vary.
a. Auto manufacturing—a shop that builds autos from scratch (the way Rolls Royce
used to build cars, or a car that can be built from kits) would use job-order costing.
Large automobile manufacturers use process costing. (While the customer may
think the car is being built to order when selecting among options, actually the
manufacturer waits until enough of the same orders are received to build a run
of virtually identical cars.)
b. Dental services—basic dental services use job-order costing, but denturists (who
make only dentures) can use process costing. (It is important to recognize that
while the dentures themselves are uniquely shaped to fit each patient, the costs
involved do not differ from patient to patient.)
c. Auto repair—a general automobile repair shop uses job-order costing. However,
a shop devoted to only one type of service or repair (e.g., oil change) can use
process costing yet price the cost of the number of quarts of oil used for each
customer.
d. Costume making—a small tailor shop would use job-order costing. However, a
large costume manufacturer that sews a certain number of costume designs
would use process costing.
EXERCISES
4-12
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-38
1. Predetermined Overhead Rate = $522,900/83,000 DLH
= $6.30 per direct labor hour
2. Applied Overhead = $6.30 × 7,600 DLH
= $47,880
E 4-39
1. Predetermined Overhead Rate = $582,400/80,000 DLH
= $7.28 per direct labor hour
2. Applied Overhead = $7.28 × 6,950 DLH
= $50,596
3. Applied Overhead = $7.28 × 84,100 DLH
= $612,248
Actual overhead…………………………… $613,320
Applied overhead………………………… 612,248
Underapplied overhead………………… $ 1,072
4. Adjusted Cost of Goods Sold = $927,000 + $1,072 = $928,072
E 4-40
1. Assembly Department Overhead Rate = $338,000/130,000 DLH
= $2.60 per direct labor hour
Testing Department Overhead Rate = $630,000/120,000 mhrs
= $5.25 per machine hour
2. Assembly Department Applied Overhead = $2.60 × 11,700 = $30,420
Testing Department Applied Overhead = $5.25 × 10,900 = $57,225
3. Assembly Testing
Department Department
Actual overhead…………………………… $29,850 $58,000
Applied overhead………………………… 30,420 57,225
Overhead variance…………………… $ (570) $ 775
Assembly department has overapplied overhead of $570.
Testing department has underapplied overhead of $775.
4-13
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-41
1. Ending Balance = Beginning Balance + Prime Costs + Applied Overhead
$1,921 = $1,235 + $560 + Applied Overhead
Applied Overhead = $1,921 – $1,235 – $560 = $126
2. Direct Materials = 3 × Direct Labor
Prime Cost = Direct Materials + Direct Labor
$560 = (3 × Direct Labor) + Direct Labor
Direct Labor = $560/4 = $140
Direct Materials = 3 × Direct Labor = 3($140) = $420
3. Applied Overhead = Direct Labor × Overhead Rate
$126 = $140 × Overhead Rate
Overhead Rate = $126/$140 = 0.90, or 90%
E 4-42
1. Materials requisition form
2. Time ticket
3. Mileage log
4. Job-order cost sheet
E 4-43
1. Job 93 Direct Labor Hours = $2,160/$18 = 120 DLH
Job 94 Direct Labor Hours = $5,400/$18 = 300 DLH
Job 95 Direct Labor Hours = $2,610/$18 = 145 DLH
Job 96 Direct Labor Hours = $900/$18 = 50 DLH
2. August applied overhead for:
Job 93 = 120 DLH × $8 = $960
Job 94 = 300 DLH × $8 = $2,400
Job 95 = 145 DLH × $8 = $1,160
Job 96 = 50 DLH × $8 = $400
3. Job 93 Job 94 Job 95 Job 96
Beginning balance……… $ 8,750 $ 7,300 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials………… 950 4,500 3,300 1,300
Direct labor……………… 2,160 5,400 2,610 900
Applied overhead……… 960 2,400 1,160 400
Total…………………… $12,820 $19,600 $7,070 $2,600
4. Work in Process, August 31, consists of unfinished jobs:
Job 94……………………… $19,600
Job 95……………………… 7,070
Job 96……………………… 2,600
Total…………………… $29,270
4-14
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-43 (Concluded)
5. Price of Job 93 = $12,820 + (0.40 × $12,820) = $17,948
6. Jagjit could treat the acquisition and use of the bulldozer as a separate department
and create a departmental overhead rate for it based on the hours used. That is, the
overhead rate would be the total budgeted cost of the bulldozer (depreciation, fuel,
maintenance, and so on) divided by the anticipated annual hours of use. In this way,
only the jobs requiring the use of the heavier equipment would be charged for it.
E 4-44
Job 877 Job 878 Job 879 Job 880
1. Beginning balance…………… $18,640 $ 0 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials……………… 14,460 6,000 3,500 1,800
Direct labor…………………… 14,800 8,500 1,750 2,150
2. Applied overhead in October for:
Job 877 = $14,800 × 0.80 = $11,840
Job 878 = $8,500 × 0.80 = $6,800
Job 879 = $1,750 × 0.80 = $1,400
Job 880 = $2,150 × 0.80 = $1,720
3. Work in Process, October 31:
Job 878*…………………………………………………………… $21,300
Job 879**…………………………………………………………… 6,650
Job 880***………………………………………………………… 5,670
Total…………………………………………………………… $33,620
* $6,000 + $8,500 + $6,800 = $21,300
** $3,500 + $1,750 + $1,400 = $6,650
*** $1,800 + $2,150 + $1,720 = $5,670
4. Cost of Job 877 = $18,640 + $14,460 + $14,800 + $11,840 = $59,740
Price of Job 877 = $59,740 + (0.50 × $59,740) = $89,610
E 4-45
1. Balance in Work in Process (all incomplete jobs):
Job 303…………………………………………………………… $ 780
Job 306…………………………………………………………… 350
Job 308…………………………………………………………… 620
Job 309…………………………………………………………… 1,200
Job 310…………………………………………………………… 515
Total…………………………………………………………… $3,465
4-15
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-45 (Concluded)
2. Balance in Finished Goods (all jobs completed but not sold):
Beginning balance (Job 300)………………………………… $ 300
Job 301…………………………………………………………… 1,600
Job 304…………………………………………………………… 2,300
Job 305…………………………………………………………… 4,150
Total…………………………………………………………… $8,350
3. Cost of Goods Sold = Job 302 + Job 307
= $1,240 + $710
=
E 4-46
1. Job 86 Job 87 Job 88
Balance, July 1……………………………… $15,310 $ 4,250 $ 0
Direct materials……………………………… 4,450 10,300 13,150
Direct labor…………………………………… 16,000 12,200 24,000
Applied overhead…………………………… 5,000 3,000 10,000
Total………………………………………… $40,760 $29,750 $47,150
2. Work in Process, July 31 = Job 87 = $29,750
3. Finished Goods:
Beginning balance…………………………………………… $ 49,000
Job 88 (transferred in)………………………………………… 47,150
Job 82 (sold)…………………………………………………… (25,600)
Ending balance, July 31…………………………………… $ 70,550
4. Cost of Goods Sold = Job 82 + Job 86
= $25,600 + $40,760
=
5. Sales [$66,360 + (0.20 × $66,360)]…………………………… $79,632
Cost of goods sold………………………………………….… 66,360
Gross margin……………………………………………… $13,272
Less:
Variable marketing expenses (0.04 × $79,632)……… $3,185
Fixed marketing expenses……………………………… 1,275
Administrative expenses………………………………… 3,900 8,360
Operating income……………………………………………… $ 4,912
$66,360
$1,950
4-16
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-47
Job 213:
1. Number of Units =
= $855/$8.55
=
2. Total Sales Revenue = Price per Unit × Number of Units
= $12 × 100 units
= $1,200
3. Direct Labor Hours, Department 1 =
= $90/$6
= 15 DLH
Direct Labor Cost, Department 1 = 15 direct labor hours × $10 = $150
4. Overhead Applied, Department 2 = 25 machine hours × $8
= $200
Job 214:
1. Price per Unit =
= $4,375/350 units
=
2. Direct Labor Hours, Department 1 =
= $700/$10
= 70 DLH
Overhead Applied, Department 1 = Direct Labor Hours,
Department 1 × $6
= 70 DLH × $6
= $420
3. Materials Used in Production = Total Manufacturing Cost –
Direct Labor Cost,
Department 1 – Direct Labor Cost,
Department 2 – Overhead Applied,
Department 1 – Overhead Applied,
Department 2
= $3,073 – $700 – $100 – $420 – $400
= $1,453
Unit Cost
Total Manufacturing Cost
100 units
Direct Labor Rate
Total Sales Revenue
Number of Units
Direct Labor Cost, Department 1
$12.50
Overhead Applied, Department 1
Overhead Rate, Department 1
4-17
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-47 (Concluded)
4. Unit Cost =
= $3,073/350 units
=
Job 217:
1. Machine Hours, Department 2 =
= $160/$8
= 20 mhrs
2. Total Manufacturing Cost = Unit Cost × Number of Units
= $9.87 × 400 units
= $3,948
3. Direct Labor Cost, Department 2 = Total Manufacturing Cost – Materials
Used in Production – Direct Labor Cost,
Department 1 – Overhead Applied,
Department 1 – Overhead Applied,
Department 2
= $3,948 – $488 – $2,000 – $1,200 – $160
= $100
Job 225:
1. Number of Units =
= $1,150/$5 = 230 units
2. Unit Cost =
= $575/230 units
=
3. Machine Hours, Department 2 =
= $0/$8
= 0 mhrs
Total Sales Revenue
Overhead Applied, Department 2
Overhead Rate
Number of Units
Total Manufacturing Cost
$8.78
Price per Unit
Overhead Applied, Department 2
Overhead Rate
Number of Units
Total Manufacturing Cost
$2.50
4-18
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-48
1. Direct materials……………………………..…………………… $12,000
Direct labor:
Department A…………………………………………………… $8,100
Department B…………………………………………………… 2,160 10,260
Overhead ($10 × 570 DLH)……………………………………… 5,700
Total manufacturing costs…………………………………… $27,960
2. Unit Cost = $27,960/1,000 units = $27.96
3. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $12,000
Direct labor:
Department A…………………………………………………… $8,100
Department B…………………………………………………… 2,160 10,260
Overhead:
Department A ($3 × 450)……………………………………… 1,350
Department B ($7 × 800)……………………………………… 5,600
Total manufacturing costs……………………………………… $29,210
4. Unit Cost = $29,210/1,000 units = $29.21
E 4-49
1. Job 39 Job 40 Job 41 Job 42 Job 43
Balance, April 1 $ 540 $3,400 $2,990 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials 700 560 375 3,500 6,900
Direct labor 500 600 490 2,500 3,000
Applied overhead 550 660 539 2,750 3,300
Total cost $2,290 $5,220 $4,394 $8,750 $13,200
2. Ending Balance in Work in Process = Job 39 + Job 42
= $2,290 + $8,750 = $11,040
Cost of Goods Sold for April = Job 40 + Job 41 + Job 43
= $5,220 + $4,394 + $13,200 = $22,814
3.
Sales [$22,814 + (0.30 × $22,814)]……..………..……….………………….…… $29,658
Cost of goods sold……………….…………………………..…….……………… 22,814
Gross margin…………………….…………………………..…….…………… $ 6,844
Less: Selling and administrative expenses………….………………………… 4,575
Operating income………………….…………………………..…….………… $ 2,269
For the Month Ended April 30
Ensign Landscape Design
Income Statement
4-19
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-50
1.
Credit
a. Raw Materials
Accounts Payable 29,670
b. Work in Process
Raw Materials 24,500
c. Work in Process
Wages Payable 32,400
d. Overhead Control
Various Payables 17,880
e. Work in Process
Overhead Control 8,640
Total Direct Labor Hours = $32,400/$18 = 1,800 DLH
Applied Overhead = 1,800 DLH × $4.80 = $8,640
f. Finished Goods
Work in Process 50,020
g. Cost of Goods Sold
Finished Goods 53,040
Accounts Receivable
Sales Revenue 74,256
2. Job 58 Job 59 Job 60
Direct materials………………………………… $ 9,200 $ 8,900 $ 6,400
Direct labor……………………………………. 14,400 10,800 7,200
Applied overhead……………………………… 3,840 2,880 1,920
Total cost…………………………………… $27,440 $22,580 $15,520
3. Raw Materials:
Beginning balance…………………………… $ 2,300
Purchases……………………………………… 29,670
Direct materials……………………………….. (24,500)
Ending balance…………………………… $ 7,470
24,500
Journal
Date Account & Explanation Debit
29,670
32,400
74,256
8,640
17,880
50,020
53,040
4-20
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-50 (Concluded)
4. Work in Process:
Beginning balance…………………………………………… $ 0
Direct materials………………………………………………… 24,500
Direct labor……………………………………………………… 32,400
Applied overhead……………………………………………… 8,640
Jobs completed:
Job 58………………………………………………………… $27,440
Job 59……………………………………………..………… 22,580 (50,020)
Ending balance………………………………………………… $ 15,520
5. Finished Goods:
Beginning balance…………………………………………… $ 25,600
Jobs transferred in:
Job 58……………………………………………….……… $27,440
Job 59………………………………………………………. 22,580 50,020
Jobs sold:
Job 57………………………………………………………… $25,600
Job 58……………………………………………….……… 27,440 (53,040)
Ending balance………………………………………………… $ 22,580
E 4-51
1. Allocation ratios for Power based on number of machine hours:
Battery = 7,000/(7,000 + 1,000) = 0.8750
Small Motors = 1,000/(7,000 + 1,000) = 0.1250
Allocation ratios for General Factory based on square footage:
Battery = 5,000/(5,000 + 15,000) = 0.2500
Small Motors = 15,000/(5,000 + 15,000) = 0.7500
2.
General Small
Power Factory Battery Motors
Direct costs………………… $ 160,000 $ 430,000 $163,000 $ 84,600
Allocate:
Power…………………… (160,000) — 140,000 20,000
General Factory………… — (430,000) 107,500 322,500
Total………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $410,500 $427,100
3. Battery Overhead Rate = $410,500/18,000 DLH = $22.81
Small Motors Overhead Rate = $427,100/60,000 DLH = $7.12
Support Departments Operating Divisions
4-21
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
E 4-52
1. Allocation ratios for General Factory based on square footage:
Power = 1,000/(1,000 + 5,000 + 15,000) = 0.0476
Battery = 5,000/(1,000 + 5,000 + 15,000) = 0.2381
Small Motors = 15,000/(1,000 + 5,000 + 15,000) = 0.7143
Allocation ratios for Power based on number of machine hours:
Battery = 7,000/(7,000 + 1,000) = 0.8750
Small Motors = 1,000/(7,000 + 1,000) = 0.1250
2. Support Departments
General Small
Power Factory Battery Motors
Direct costs………………… $ 160,000 $163,000 $ 84,600
Allocate:
Power……………………… 20,468 (430,000) 102,383 307,149
General Factory*………… (180,468) — 157,910 22,559
Total………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $423,293 $414,308
* Totals for Battery and Small Motors do not add to the total for General Factory due to rounding.
Because all support department cost must be transferred to the producing departments, the
company will just “live with” the increase in cost transferred out.
3. Battery Overhead Rate = $423,293/18,000 DLH = $23.52
Small Motors Overhead Rate = $414,308/60,000 DLH = $6.91
$ 430,000
Operating Divisions
4-22
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-53
1. Overhead Rate = $789,000/100,000 DLH = $7.89 per DLH
2. Job 741 Job 743 Job 744 Job 745
Balance, July 1……… $ 29,870 $27,880 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials…… 25,500 14,450 13,600 8,420
Direct labor………… 61,300 28,700 24,500 21,300
Applied overhead…… 31,560 15,622 12,624 11,046
Total cost………… $148,230 $86,652 $50,724 $40,766
3. Ending Balance in Work in Process = Job 742 + Job 744 + Job 745
= $170,341 + $50,724 + $40,766
= $261,831
4. Cost of Goods Sold = Job 741 + Job 743
= $148,230 + $86,652
= $234,882
P 4-54
1. Cost of Alban job:
Professional time (85 hours × $120)……………………………… $10,200
Mileage (510 miles @ $0.50)………………………………………… 255
Photographs…………………………………………………………… 120
Total………………………………………………………………… $10,575
2. Overhead is included in the rate for professional time. This is easier for
professionals than to calculate a separate overhead rate and charge it to clients.
In effect, Spade Millhone charges a conversion cost rate, not a labor rate, to its
clients.
PROBLEMS
Job 742
$ 55,215
39,800
48,500
26,826
$170,341
4-23
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-54 (Concluded)
3. Answers may vary. The following is one example.
Beginning Ending Total
Date Client Mileage Mileage Miles
7/8 Alban 56,780 56,815 Ofc. to claimant #1, 35
to Dr. Phony, to
claimant #2, to ofc.
7/9 Alban 56,815 56,903 Ofc. to claimant #3, 88
to claimant #4, to ofc.
7/10 Alban 56,903 57,078 Ofc. to witness #3, 175
to client, to ofc.
7/11 Alban 57,078 57,290 Ofc. to claimant #2, 212
to claimant #4, to ofc.
Note: Separate mileage logs are kept by Rex Spade and Victoria Millhone.
Then, relevant amounts are transferred to cost sheets (or folders) for each
client.
Rex Spade Mileage Log
Destination
4-24
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-55
1. Overhead Rate = $374/$440 = 0.8500 times direct labor cost
(This rate was calculated using information from the Carter job; however, the
Pelham and Tillson jobs would give the same answer.)
2. Carter Pelham Tillson Jasper Dashell
Beginning WIP……… $1,024 $1,910 $3,621 $ 0 $ 0
Direct materials…… 600 550 770 2,310 190
Direct labor………… 300 200 240 2,100 240
Applied overhead…… 255 170 204 1,785 204
Total……………… $2,179 $2,830 $4,835 $6,195 $634
Note: This is just one way of setting up the job-order cost sheets. You might
prefer to keep the details on the materials, labor, and overhead in beginning
inventory costs.
3. Since the Tillson and Jasper jobs were completed, the others must still be in
process. Therefore, the ending balance in Work in Process is the sum of the costs
of the Carter, Pelham, and Dashell jobs.
Carter………………………………… $2,179
Pelham……………………………… 2,830
Dashell……………………………… 634
Ending work in process……… $5,643
Cost of Goods Sold = Tillson Job + Jasper Job = $4,835 + $6,195 = $11,030
4.
Sales (1.30 × $11,030)……………………………………………………………… $14,339
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………………… 11,030
Gross margin…………………………………………………………………… $ 3,309
Marketing and administrative expenses………………………………………… 2,635
Operating income……………………………………………………………… $ 674
Pavlovich Prosthetics Company
Income Statement
For the Month Ended January 31
4-25
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-56
1. OH Rate = $108,000/18,000 mhrs = $6.00 per machine hour
2. Department A: $75,000/10,000 mhrs = $7.500 per machine hour
Department B: $33,000/8,000 mhrs = $4.125 per machine hour
3.
Plantwide: Plantwide:
70 mhrs × $6.00 = $420 70 mhrs × $6.00 = $420
Departmental: Departmental:
20 mhrs × $7.500……… $150.00 50 mhrs × $7.500………… $375.00
50 mhrs × $4.125……… 206.25 20 mhrs × $4.125………… 82.50
$356.25 $457.50
Department A appears to be more overhead intensive, so jobs spending more
time in Department A ought to receive more overhead. Thus, departmental rates
provide more accuracy.
4. Plantwide rate: $135,000/18,000 mhrs = $7.50
Department B: $60,000/8,000 mhrs = $7.50
Plantwide: Plantwide:
70 mhrs × $7.50 = $525 70 mhrs × $7.50 = $525
Departmental: Departmental:
20 mhrs × $7.50………… $150.00 50 mhrs × $7.50…………… $375.00
50 mhrs × $7.50………… 375.00 20 mhrs × $7.50…………… 150.00
$525.00 $525.00
Assuming that machine hours is a good cost driver, the departmental rates reveal
that overhead consumption is the same in each department. In this case, there is
no need for departmental rates, and a plantwide rate is sufficient.
Job 73
Job 73 Job 74
Job 74
4-26
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-57
1. Overhead Rate = $432,000/8,000 mhrs = $54.00 per machine hour
Job 1 Job 2
Direct materials…………………………………………… $ 6,725 $ 9,340
Direct labor……………………………………………….… 1,800 3,100
Overhead ($54.00 × 200 machine hours)……………… 10,800 10,800
Total manufacturing cost……………………………… $19,325 $23,240
Plus 35% markup…………………………………………… 6,764 8,134
Bid price………………………………………………… $26,089 $31,374
2. Welding Overhead Rate = $220,000/5,000 mhrs = $44.00 per machine hour
Assembly Overhead Rate = $62,000/10,000 dlhrs = $6.20 direct labor hour
Finishing Overhead Rate = $150,000/2,000 mhrs = $75.00 per machine hour
Job 1 Job 2
Direct materials……………………………………………… $ 6,725 $ 9,340
Direct labor………………………………………………… 1,800 3,100
Overhead:
Welding ($44.00 × 50); ($44.00 × 50)………………… 2,200 2,200
Assembly ($6.20 × 60); ($6.20 × 20)………………… 372 124
Finishing ($75.00 × 90); ($75.00 × 125)……………… 6,750 9,375
Total manufacturing cost………………………………… $17,847 $24,139
Plus 35% markup…………………………………………… 6,246 8,449
Bid price………………………………………….……… $24,093 $32,588
4-27
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-58
1. Jan’s Job Ed’s Job
Materials……………………………………………….…………… $ 50 $ 75
Direct labor ($6 × 10 hours; $6 × 20 hours)………………… 60 120
Applied overhead:
0.20 × ($50 + $60)……………………………………………… 22
0.20 × ($75 + $120)…………………………………………… 39
Total………………………………………………………………… $132 $234
2. Since Jan’s job is more like the jobs Steve is used to doing, her costs are likely
to be more accurate. Clearly, Steve is unsure just how to cost Ed’s job. If he
expects to get more use from the tools he buys for Ed’s job, then he can absorb
them into his overhead rate. If not, perhaps they should be added to the cost of
Ed’s job as a part of materials.
P 4-59
1. Job 64:
Direct materials…………………………………………….………
Direct labor…………………………………………….…………
Overhead ($11 × 410 DLH)………………………………………
Total cost…………………………………………….…………
Unit Cost = $14,790/50 units = $295.80
2. Ending Work in Process = Cost of Job 65
= $785 + $9,328 + ($11 × 583 DLH) = $16,526
3.
Finished Goods
Work in Process 14,790
Cost of Goods Sold
Finished Goods 14,790
Accounts Receivable
Sales Revenue 25,883
(1.75 × $14,790) = $25,883
25,883
14,790
14,790
$ 3,560
6,720
4,510
$14,790
Date
Journal
Account & Explanation Debit Credit
4-28
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-60
1.
Debit
a. Raw Materials 4,610
Accounts Payable 4,610
b. Work in Process 4,800
Raw Materials 4,800
c. Work in Process [$14 × (65 DLH + 90 DLH)] 2,170
Wages Payable 2,170
d. Work in Process ($6.20 × 155 DLH) 961
Overhead Control 961
e. Overhead Control 973
Cash 973
2.
Direct materials……………… $3,170 Direct materials……………… $1,630
Direct labor…………………… 910 Direct labor…………………… 1,260
Applied overhead…………… 403 Applied overhead…………… 558
Total………………………… $4,483 Total………………………… $3,448
Debit
f. Finished Goods 4,483
Work in Process 4,483
g. Cost of Goods Sold 2,770
Finished Goods 2,770
Accounts Receivable 3,463
Sales ($2,770 × 1.25) 3,463
Date Account & Explanation Credit
Journal
Date Account & Explanation Credit
Job 518 Job 519
Journal
4-29
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-60 (Concluded)
3.
Direct materials:
Beginning raw materials inventory…………… $1,025
Purchases of raw materials…………………… 4,610
Total raw materials available………………… $5,635
Ending raw materials…………………………… 835
Raw materials used……………………………… $4,800
Direct labor…………………………………..……… 2,170
Overhead……………………………………………… $ 973
Less: Underapplied overhead………………… 12
Overhead applied………………………………… 961
Current manufacturing costs……………………… $7,931
Add: Beginning work in process………………… 0
Total manufacturing costs…………………… $7,931
Less: Ending work in process…………………… 3,448
Cost of goods manufactured………………… $4,483
P 4-61
1. = Direct Labor Cost × Overhead Rate
= $80,000 × Overhead Rate
= 1.75, or 175% of Direct Labor Cost
2. Applied overhead………………………………..…………………… $140,000
Actual overhead………………………………..……………………… 138,500
Overapplied overhead………………………………..…………… $ 1,500
3. Direct materials………………………………………………………… $ 40,000
Direct labor……………………………………………………………… 80,000
Overhead applied……………………………………………………… 140,000
$260,000
Add: Beginning work in process…………………………………… 17,000
Less: Ending work in process……………………………………… (32,000)
Cost of goods manufactured……………………………………… $245,000
Nelson Company
Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured
For the Month Ended April 30
Overhead Rate
$140,000
Applied Overhead
4-30
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-61 (Concluded)
4.
Debit
Overhead Control 1,500
Cost of Goods Sold 1,500
Adjusted Cost of Goods Sold:
$210,000
(1,500)
$208,500
5. Direct labor (1,000 × $10)……………………………………………………… $10,000
Overhead applied (1.75 × 10,000)…………………………………………… 17,500
Direct materials ($32,000 – $10,000 – $17,500)……..……………………… 4,500
Ending work in process…………………………………………………… $32,000
P 4-62
1. Overhead Rate = $129,600/13,500 DLH = $9.60 per direct labor hour
2. Direct materials………………………………………………………………… $ 2,750
Direct labor……………………………………….……………………………… 5,355
Applied overhead*……………………………………………………………… 3,024
Total cost of Job K456……………………………………….…………… $11,129
* $9.60 × ($5,355/$17) = $3,024
3.
Debit
Overhead Control 172,500
Lease Payable 6,800
Accumulated Depreciation 19,340
Wages Payable 90,400
Utilities Payable 14,560
Other Payables 41,400
Work in Process ($9.60 × 18,100 DLH) 173,760
Overhead Control 173,760
4. Actual overhead……………………………………………… $172,500
Applied overhead……………………………………..……… 173,760
Overapplied overhead…………………………………… $ 1,260
5. Normal cost of goods sold………………………………… $635,600
Less: Overapplied overhead……………………………… (1,260)
Adjusted cost of goods sold…………………………… $634,340
Date Account & Explanation Credit
Journal
Date Account & Explanation Credit
Journal
4-31
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-63
1.
Debit
a. Raw Materials 42,630
Accounts Payable 42,630
b. Work in Process 27,000
Raw Materials 27,000
c. Work in Process 26,320
Wages Payable 26,320
d. Overhead Control 19,950
Cash 19,950
e. Work in Process [($26,320/$14) × $10] 18,800
Overhead Control 18,800
2. Job 703:
Beginning balance, work in process…………………… $10,000
Direct materials……………………………………………… 12,500
Direct labor ($14 × 780 DLH)……………………………… 10,920
Overhead applied ($10 × 780 DLH)……………………… 7,800
Total………………………………………………………… $41,220
Job 704:
Direct materials……………………………………………… $14,500
Direct labor ($14 × 1,100 DLH)…………………………… 15,400
Overhead applied ($10 × 1,100 DLH)…………………… 11,000
Total………………………………………………………… $40,900
Journal
Date Account & Explanation Credit
4-32
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-63 (Concluded)
3.
Debit Credit
f. Finished Goods 41,220
Work in Process 41,220
h. Cost of Goods Sold 6,240
Finished Goods 6,240
Accounts Receivable 8,112
Sales 8,112
4. a. Raw Materials:
Beginning balance………………………… $ 6,070
Add: Purchases………………………… 42,630
Less: Materials requisitioned………… (27,000)
Ending balance………………………… $ 21,700
b. Work in Process:
Beginning balance………………………… $ 10,000
Add: Materials requisitioned………… 27,000
Direct labor………………………… 26,320
Overhead applied………………… 18,800
Less: Jobs completed…………………… (41,220)
Ending balance………………………… $ 40,900
c. Finished Goods:
Beginning balance………………………… $ 6,240
Add: Jobs completed…………………… 41,220
Less: Jobs sold…………………………… (6,240)
Ending balance………………………… $41,220
Journal
Date Account & Explanation
4-33
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-64
1. Direct method:
Proportion of: Laboratory Pathology
Number of samples……………………… 0.6000 0.4000
Transactions processed………………… 0.6500 0.3500
Direct costs…………………………………… $345,000 $456,000
Delivery:
(0.6000 × $240,000)……………………… 144,000
(0.4000 × $240,000)……………………… 96,000
Accounting:
(0.65 × $270,000)………………………… 175,500
(0.35 × $270,000)………………………… 94,500
Total…………………………………………… $664,500 $646,500
2. Delivery Accounting Laboratory Pathology
Transactions……………… 0.0500 — 0.6175 0.3325
Number of samples……… — — 0.6000 0.4000
Direct costs………………… $ 240,000 $ 270,000 $345,000 $456,000
Accounting:
(0.0500 × $270,000)…… 13,500 (13,500)
(0.6175 × $270,000)…… (166,725) 166,725
(0.3325 × $270,000)…… (89,775) 89,775
Delivery:
(0.6000 × $253,500)…… (152,100) 152,100
(0.4000 × $253,500)…… (101,400) 101,400
Total………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $663,825 $647,175
P 4-65
1. a. Direct method:
Drilling Assembly
Machine hours………………………… 0.8000 0.2000
Kilowatt-hours………………………… 0.1000 0.9000
Maintenance:
(0.80 × $320,000)…………………… $256,000
(0.20 × $320,000)…………………… $ 64,000
Power:
(0.10 × $400,000)…………………… 40,000
(0.90 × $400,000)…………………… 360,000
Direct costs……………………………… 163,000 90,000
Total…………………………………… $459,000 $514,000
4-34
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
P 4-65 (Concluded)
Drilling: $459,000/30,000 mhrs = $15.30 per machine hour
Assembly: $514,000/40,000 DLH = $12.85 per direct labor hour
Prime costs………………………………………………… $1,817.00
Drilling ($15.30 × 2 mhrs)………………………………… 30.60
Assembly ($12.85 × 50 DLH)…………………………… 642.50
Total cost……………………………………………… $2,490.10
Markup (15%)……………………………………………… 373.52
Bid price………………………………………………… $2,863.62
b. Sequential method: Allocate Power first, then Maintenance
Maintenance Power Drilling Assembly
Machine hours……… — — 0.80 0.20
Kilowatt-hours……… 0.10 — 0.09 0.81
Direct costs…………… $ 320,000 $ 400,000 $163,000 $ 90,000
Power:
(0.10 × $400,000)… 40,000 (40,000)
(0.09 × $400,000)… (36,000) 36,000
(0.81 × $400,000)… (324,000) 324,000
Maintenance:
(0.80 × $360,000)… (288,000) — 288,000
(0.20 × $360,000)… (72,000) 72,000
Total…………………… $ 0 $ 0 $487,000 $486,000
Drilling: $487,000/30,000 mhrs = $16.23 per machine hour
Assembly: $486,000/40,000 DLH = $12.15 per direct labor hour
Prime costs………………………………………………… $1,817.00
Drilling ($16.23 × 2 mhrs)………………………………… 32.46
Assembly ($12.15 × 50 DLH)…………………………… 607.50
Total cost……………………………………………… $2,456.96
Markup (15%)……………………………………………… 368.54
Bid price………………………………………………… $2,825.50
2. The sequential method is the more accurate because it considers some of the
support department interactions.
4-35
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
Case 4-66
1. Mrs. Lucky won’t like being charged more for one job when the same number
and type of announcements were produced in each job.
2. May: Actual Rate = $20,000/500 hours = $40 per hour
Overhead assigned: $40 × 5 hours = $200
June and July: Actual Rate = $20,000/250 hours = $80 per hour
Overhead assigned: $80 × 5 hours = $400
3. Predetermined Rate = $240,000/(500 hours × 12) = $40 per hour
Cost and price of each job:
Direct materials………………………
Direct labor……………………………
Overhead (5 hours × $40)…………
Total cost…………………………
Plus 25% markup……………………
Price…………………………………
Using a predetermined rate will avoid the nonuniform production revealed in
the first two requirements and result in a more accurate application of overhead
and fairer costing of the summer jobs.
CASES
$593.75
$250.00
25.00
200.00
$475.00
118.75
4-36
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 4 Job-Order Costing and Overhead Application
Case 4-67
1. The solution Doug proposes is not ethical. Although maintaining the current
plantwide rate is probably not illegal, its continuation has one purpose: to extract
extra profits from government business. Doug knows the plantwide rate is not
accurately assigning overhead costs to the various jobs and is willing to alter the
assignments on an “unofficial basis” for purposes of bidding on private-sector
jobs. Fundamentally, ethical behavior is concerned with choosing right over
wrong. To knowingly overcharge the government for future business certainly
seems wrong. To continue overpricing knowing the new overhead rates would
more than make up for any lost profits from the government sector (through more
competitive bidding in the private sector) is a clear indication of greed. While
managers have an obligation to maximize profits, this obligation must be within
ethical boundaries.
2. Tonya should first determine whether or not Gunderson has a corporate code of
conduct. She can pursue the avenues suggested by the code. For example, if
Tonya cannot persuade Doug to refrain from implementing his scheme, she
could present her objections to Doug’s immediate supervisor. If a resolution
cannot be realized at this level, then Tonya should go to the next higher
management level. If no resolution is possible after appealing to all higher levels,
then resignation may be the only remaining option.
4-37
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All rights reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

COST BEHAVIOR AND FORECASTING

1. Knowledge of cost behavior allows a manager to assess changes in costs that result from
changes in activity. This allows a manager to examine the effects of choices that change activity.
For example, if excess capacity exists, bids that at least cover variable costs may be totally
appropriate. Knowing what costs are variable and what costs are fixed can help a manager make
better bids and, ultimately, better business decisions.
2. A driver is a factor that causes or leads to a change in a cost or activity; it is an output measure.
The driver for general machine maintenance cost in a factory could be machine hours. The driver
for raw materials used is the number of units produced.
3. The cost formula for monthly shipping cost is:
Monthly Shipping Cost = $3,560 + $6.70 × Packages Shipped
The independent variable is packages shipped. The dependent variable is monthly shipping cost.
The fixed cost per month is $3,560. The variable rate is $6.70.
4. Some account categories are primarily fixed or variable. Even if the cost is mixed, either the fixed
component or the variable component is relatively small. As a result, assigning all of the cost to
either a fixed or variable category is unlikely to result in large errors. For example, depreciation on
property, plant, and equipment is largely fixed. The cost of telephone expense for the sales office,
if it consisted primarily of long-distance calls, could be seen as largely variable (variable with
respect to the number of customers).
5. Committed fixed costs are those incurred for the acquisition of long-term activity capacity and are
not subject to change in the short run. Annual resource expenditure is independent of actual
usage. For example, the cost of a factory building is a committed fixed cost. Discretionary fixed
costs are those incurred for the acquisition of short-term activity capacity, the levels of which can
be altered quickly. In the short run, resource expenditure is also independent of actual activity
usage. Salaries of engineers are an example of such an expenditure.
6. The concept of relevant range is important in dealing with step costs because if the relevant range
is contained completely within one step, the cost behaves as a fixed cost. However, if the relevant
range spans two or more steps, the accountant must be aware of the cost increase as output
goes up within the relevant range.
7. Mixed costs are usually reported in total in the accounting records. How much of the cost is fixed
and how much is variable is unknown and must be estimated.
8. The cost formula for a strictly fixed cost has only a fixed cost amount. There is no variable rate
and no independent variable. For the depreciation example, the cost formula looks like this:
Depreciation per Year = $15,000
9. The cost formula for a strictly variable cost has only the variable rate and independent variable.
There is no fixed component. For the electrical power example, the cost formula looks like this:
Electrical Power = $1.15 × Machine Hours
3 COST BEHAVIOR AND
FORECASTING
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
3-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
10. A scattergraph allows a visual portrayal of the relationship between cost and activity. It
reveals to the investigator whether a relationship may exist and, if so, whether a linear
function can be used to approximate the relationship.
11. Managers can use their knowledge of the cost relationships to estimate the fixed and
variable components. A scattergraph can be used as an aid in this process. From a
scattergraph, a manager can select two points that best represent the relationship.
These two points can then be used to derive a linear cost formula. The high-low method
tells the manager which two points to select to compute the linear cost formula. The
selection of the two points is not left to judgment.
12. Because the scattergraph method is not restricted to the high and low points, it is
possible to select two points that better represent the relationship between activity and
costs, producing a better estimate of fixed and variable costs. The main advantage of the
high-low method is that it removes subjectivity from the choice process. The same line
will be produced by two different people.
13. Assuming that the scattergraph reveals that a linear cost function is suitable, then the
method of least squares selects a line that best fits the data points. The method also
provides a measure of goodness of fit so that the strength of the relationship between
cost and activity can be assessed.
14. The best-fitting line is the one that is “closest” to the data points. This is usually
measured by the line that has the smallest sum of squared deviations from the individual
data points.
15. The only difference between absorption costing and variable costing is the way in which
fixed overhead costs are assigned. Under variable costing, fixed overhead is a period cost;
under absorption costing, it is a product cost.
16. Absorption-costing income is greater because some of the period’s fixed overhead is placed
in inventory and not recognized as part of cost of goods sold on the absorption-costing
income statement.
17. The coefficient of determination is the percentage of total variability in costs explained by
activity. As such, it is a measure of goodness of fit, the strength of the relationship
between cost and activity.
3-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
3-1. c
3-2. e
3-3. b
3-4. d
3-5. a
3-6. d
3-7. c
3-8. d Total Cost = $235,000 + ($75 × 8,000) = $835,000
3-9. b
3-10. b
3-11. a
3-12. e
3-13. b
3-14. b
3-15. d
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
3-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-16
1. The cost formula takes the following form:
Total Cost = Fixed Cost + (Variable Rate × Number of Flash Drives)
The monthly fixed cost is the $15,000 cost of equipment depreciation, as it does not
vary according to the number of flash drives manufactured. The variable costs are
materials and manufacturing overhead, as both do vary with the number of flash
drives produced.
Cost of materials per flash drive is:
10,000 ounces/5,000 flash drives = 2 ounces per flash drive
Given that, the material cost per drive = $3 × 2 ounces per drive = $6.00 per drive.
Cost of manufacturing overhead per flash drive is:
$22,500/5,000 flash drives = $4.50 per drive
Therefore, the variable rate per flash drive is $6.00 + $4.50 = $10.50
The cost formula is:
Total Cost of Flash Drives = $15,000 + ($10.50 × Number of Flash Drives)
2. Expected fixed cost for next month is $15,000.
Expected variable cost for next month is:
$10.50 × 6,000 flash drives = $63,000
Expected total manufacturing cost for next month is:
$15,000 + $63,000 = $78,000
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET A
3-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-17
Step 1: Find the high and low points: The high number of employee hours is in March,
and the low number of employee hours is in August.
Step 2: Calculate the variable rate:
Variable Rate =
= ($9,899 – $7,531)/(630 – 310)
= $2,368/320
= $7.40 per employee hour
Step 3: Calculate the fixed cost:
Fixed Cost = Total Cost – (Variable Rate × Employee Hours)
Let’s choose the low point with total cost of $7,531 and employee hours of 310.
Fixed Cost = $7,531 – ($7.40 × 310) = $7,531 – $2,294 = $5,237
(Hint : Check your work by computing fixed cost using the high point.)
Step 4: Construct a cost formula:
If the variable rate is $7.40 per employee hour and fixed cost is $5,237 per month, then
the formula for total monthly labor cost is:
Total Labor Cost = $5,237 + ($7.40 × Employee Hours)
BE 3-18
1. Total Variable Labor Cost = Variable Rate × Employee Hours
= $7.40* × 675 hours
= $4,995
2. Total Labor Cost = Fixed Cost + (Variable Rate × Employee Hours)
= $5,237* + ($7.40 × 675)
= $5,237 + $4,995
* Refer to the solution for Brief Exercise 3-17 for detailed explanation of the computations for
variable cost per unit ($7.40) and total fixed cost ($5,237).
= $10,232
High Cost – Low Cost
High Employee Hours – Low Employee Hours
3-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-19
1. Total Variable Labor Cost = Variable Rate × Employee Hours
= $7.40* × 4,000 hours
2. There’s a trick here; the cost formula is for the month, but we are being asked to budget
labor cost for the year. So, we will need to multiply the fixed cost for the month by 12
(the number of months in a year).
Total Fixed Labor Cost = Fixed Cost × 12 Months in a Year
= $5,237* × 12
3. Total Labor Cost = (12 × $5,237) + ($7.40 × 4,000)
= $62,844 + $29,600
* Refer to the solution for Brief Exercise 3-17 for detailed explanation of the computations for
variable cost per unit ($7.40) and total monthly fixed cost ($5,237).
BE 3-20
1. The fixed cost and the variable rate are given directly by regression.
Fixed Cost = $4,517
Variable Rate = $8.20
2. The cost formula is:
Total Labor Cost = $4,517 + ($8.20 × Employee Hours)
3. Budgeted Labor Cost = $4,517 + ($8.20 × 675)
= $10,052
= $29,600
= $62,844
= $92,444
3-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-21
1. Units Ending Inventory = Units Beginning Inventory + Units Produced –
Units Sold
= 300 + 15,000 – 12,700
= 2,600 units
2. Direct materials………………………… $ 20
Direct labor……………………………… 60
Variable overhead……………………… 12
Fixed overhead………………………… 30
Unit product cost……………………… $122
3. Value of Ending Inventory = 2,600 units × $122 = $317,200
BE 3-22
1. Units Ending Inventory = Units Beginning Inventory + Units Produced –
Units Sold
= 300 + 15,000 – 12,700
= 2,600 units
2. Direct materials………………………… $20
Direct labor……………………………… 60
Variable overhead……………………… 12
Unit product cost……………………… $92
3. Value of Ending Inventory = 2,600 units × $92 = $239,200
BE 3-23
1. Direct materials………………………… $ 9
Direct labor……………………………… 6
Variable overhead……………………… 4
Fixed overhead………………………… 5
Unit product cost……………………… $24
Total Cost of Goods Sold = $24 × 9,300 units = $223,200
3-7
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-23 (Concluded)
2.
Sales ($47 × 9,300)………………………………………………………………… $437,100
Less: Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………… 223,200
Gross margin…………………………………………………………..………… $213,900
Less: Selling and administrative expense………………………….………… 138,000
Operating income…………………………………………………………………… $ 75,900
BE 3-24
1. Direct materials……………………………………………………………………… $ 9
Direct labor…………………………………………………………………………… 6
Variable overhead…………………………………………………………………… 4
Unit product cost…………………………………………………………………… $19
Total Cost of Goods Sold = $19 × 9,300 units = $176,700
2.
Sales ($47 × 9,300)………………………….……………………… $437,100
Less: Variable costs……………………………………………… 176,700
Contribution margin…………………………………………… $260,400
Less fixed expense:
Fixed overhead ($5 × 10,000) ……………………………… $ 50,000
Fixed selling and administrative expenses……………… 138,000 188,000
Operating income………………………………………………… $ 72,400
Osterman Company
Income Statement under Variable Costing
For the Most Recent Year
Osterman Company
Income Statement under Absorption Costing
For the Most Recent Year
3-8
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-25
1. The cost formula takes the following form:
Total Cost = Fixed Cost + (Variable Rate × Number of SUVs)
The monthly fixed cost is the $10,000,000 cost of machinery and warehouse
depreciation, as it does not vary according to the number of SUVs manufactured. The
variable costs are materials and manufacturing overhead, as both do vary with the
number of SUVs produced.
Cost of materials per SUV is:
75,000,000 pounds/50,000 SUVs = 1,500 pounds per SUV
Given that, the material cost per SUV = $0.20 × 1,500 pounds per SUV = $300.00 per SUV.
Cost of manufacturing overhead per SUV is:
$200,000,000/50,000 SUVs = $4,000.00 per SUV
Therefore, the variable rate per SUV is $300.00 + $4,000.00 = $4,300.00.
The cost formula is:
Total Cost of SUVs = $10,000,000 + ($4,300.00 × Number of SUVs)
2. Expected fixed cost for next month is $10,000,000.
Expected variable cost for next month is:
$4,300.00 × 55,000 SUVs = $236,500,000
Expected total manufacturing cost for next month is:
$10,000,000 + $236,500,000 = $246,500,000
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET B
3-9
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-26
Step 1: Find the high and low points: The high number of deliveries is in November
and the low number of deliveries is in May.
Step 2: Calculate the variable rate:
Variable Rate =
= ($75,450 – $63,450)/(2,800 – 1,800)
= $12,000/1,000
= $12.00 per delivery
Step 3: Calculate the fixed cost:
Fixed Cost = Total Cost – (Variable Rate × Number of Deliveries)
Let’s choose the low point with total cost of $63,450 and number of deliveries of 1,800.
Fixed Cost = $63,450 – ($12.00 × 1,800) = $63,450 – $21,600 = $41,850
(Hint : Check your work by computing fixed cost using the high point.)
Step 4: Construct a cost formula:
If the variable rate is $12.00 per delivery and fixed cost is $41,850 per month, then
the formula for total monthly delivery cost is:
Total Delivery Cost = $41,850 + ($12.00 × Number of Deliveries)
BE 3-27
1. Total Variable Delivery Cost = Variable Rate × Number of Deliveries
= $12.00* × 3,000 deliveries
= $36,000
2. Total Delivery Cost = Fixed Cost + (Variable Rate × Number of Deliveries)
= $41,850* + ($12.00 × 3,000)
= $41,850 + $36,000
* Refer to the solution for Brief Exercise 3-26 for detailed explanation of the computations for
variable cost per unit ($12.00) and total fixed cost ($41,850).
= $77,850
High Cost – Low Cost
High Number of Deliveries – Low Number of Deliveries
3-10
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-28
1. Total Variable Delivery Cost = Variable Rate × Number of Deliveries
= $12.00* × 3,000 deliveries
2. There’s a trick here; the cost formula is for the month, but we are being asked to
budget total delivery cost for the year. So, we will need to multiply the fixed cost for
the month by 12 (the number of months in a year).
Total Fixed Delivery Cost = Fixed Cost × 12 Months in a Year
= $41,850* × 12
3. Total Delivery Cost = (12 × $41,850) + ($12.00 × 3,000)
= $502,200 + $36,000
* Refer to the solution for Brief Exercise 3-26 for detailed explanation of the computations for
variable cost per unit ($12.00) and total monthly fixed cost ($41,850).
BE 3-29
1. The fixed cost and the variable rate are given directly by regression.
Fixed Cost = $43,293
Variable Rate = $11.34
2. The cost formula is:
Total Delivery Cost = $43,293 + ($11.34 × Number of Deliveries)
3. Budgeted Delivery Cost = $43,293 + ($11.34 × 3,000)
= $36,000
= $502,200
= $538,200
= $77,313
3-11
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-30
1. Units Ending Inventory = Units Beginning Inventory + Units Produced –
Units Sold
= 400 + 14,000 – 13,700
= 700 units
2. Direct materials………………………… $ 15
Direct labor……………………………… 36
Variable overhead……………………… 9
Fixed overhead…………………………… 40
Unit product cost………………………… $100
3. Value of Ending Inventory = 700 units × $100 = $70,000
BE 3-31
1. Units Ending Inventory = Units Beginning Inventory + Units Produced –
Units Sold
= 400 + 14,000 – 13,700
= 700 units
2. Direct materials………………………… $15
Direct labor……………………………… 36
Variable overhead……………………… 9
Unit product cost………………………… $60
3. Value of Ending Inventory = 700 units × $60 = $42,000
BE 3-32
1. Direct materials………………………… $12
Direct labor……………………………… 7
Variable overhead……………………… 5
Fixed overhead…………………………… 8
Unit product cost………………………… $32
Total Cost of Goods Sold = $32 × 8,800 units = $281,600
3-12
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
BE 3-32 (Concluded)
2.
Sales ($60 × 8,800)……………………………………………………………… $528,000
Less: Cost of goods sold……………………………………………………… 281,600
Gross margin…………………………………………………………..…… $246,400
Less: Selling and administrative expense………………………….……… 138,000
Operating income……………………………………………………………… $108,400
BE 3-33
1. Direct materials…………………………………… $12
Direct labor………………………………………… 7
Variable overhead………………………………… 5
Unit product cost…………………………………… $24
Total Cost of Goods Sold = $24 × 8,800 units = $211,200
2.
Sales ($60 × 8,800)………………………….…………………… $528,000
Less: Variable costs………………………………………….. 211,200
Contribution margin………………………………………… $316,800
Less fixed expense:
Fixed overhead ($8 × 10,000)……………………………… $ 80,000
Fixed selling and administrative expenses…………… 138,000 218,000
Operating income……………………………………………… $ 98,800
Beyta Company
Income Statement under Variable Costing
For the Most Recent Year
Beyta Company
Income Statement under Absorption Costing
For the Most Recent Year
3-13
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-34
a. Power to operate a drill (to drill holes in the wooden frames of the futons)—
Variable cost
b. Cloth to cover the futon mattress—Variable cost
c. Salary of the factory receptionist—Fixed cost
d. Cost of food and decorations for the annual Fourth of July party for all factory
employees—Fixed cost
e. Fuel for a forklift used to move materials in a factory—Variable cost
f. Depreciation on the factory—Fixed cost
g. Depreciation on a forklift used to move partially completed goods—Fixed cost
h. Wages paid to workers who assemble the futon frame—Variable cost
i. Wages paid to workers who maintain the factory equipment—Fixed cost
j. Cloth rags used to wipe the excess stain off the wooden frames—Variable cost
E 3-35
1.
EXERCISES
$0
$50,000
$100,000
$150,000
$200,000
$250,000
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Depreciation Cost
Cubic Yards of Concrete (in thousands)
Truck Depreciation
3-14
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-35 (Concluded)
2.
3. Truck depreciation: Fixed cost
Raw materials cost: Variable cost
4. Truck depreciation is a fixed cost (with respect to the driver “cubic yards of cement”).
Therefore, it cannot be managed by altering the number of cubic yards of cement,
within the relevant range of course. Instead, the cost of truck depreciation could be
reduced (or increased) by changing the depreciation method that is used to allocate
the cost to each accounting period. Also, a more long-term approach to managing the
total annual cost of truck depreciation would involve decisions to sell some trucks
(make the fleet smaller), replace certain trucks (keep the fleet the same size), or buy
additional trucks (make the fleet larger). In addition, the company could manage the
depreciation cost by arranging to rent (rather than purchase) additional trucks (and
thus only show a rent expense rather than a depreciation expense on its books) or
obtain on-site mixing equipment for large jobs (and thus not be responsible for
providing the trucks).
5. Raw materials is a variable cost (with respect to the driver “cubic yards of cement”).
Therefore, total raw materials cost likely is best reduced (or managed) either by using
fewer cubic yards of cement per job (i.e., more efficient use of cement) or by paying
less to purchase or manufacture each cubic yard of cement (i.e., more efficient
purchasing or manufacturing of cement). Also, a more long-term approach to reducing
raw materials cost would be to discover different, cheaper materials that can be used
in the business that yield the same quality of output as the existing materials.
E 3-36
Technician salaries
Laboratory facility
Laboratory equipment
Chemicals and other supplies
X
Committed
Fixed Cost
X
XX
Cost Category
Variable
Cost
Discretionary
Fixed Cost
$0
$500
$1,000
$1,500
$2,000
$2,500
0 20 40 60 80 100
Cost (in thousands)
Cubic Yards of Concrete (in thousands)
Raw Materials Cost
3-15
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-37
1. Total Maintenance Cost = $1,750,000 + ($125.00 × 50,000) = $8,000,000
2. Total Fixed Maintenance Cost = $1,750,000
3. Total Variable Maintenance Cost = $125.00 × 50,000 = $6,250,000
4. Total Maintenance
Cost per Unit
= $8,000,000/50,000 units
= $160.00
5. Fixed Maintenance Cost per Unit = $1,750,000/50,000 units = $35.00
6. Variable Maintenance Cost per Unit = $125.00
7. Alisha management could identify (via research or conversations with its operations
personnel or employees at other similar organizations) additional drivers of maintenance
costs besides the total number of medical stents manufactured. For example, different
types of medical stents might require different types of raw materials, different amounts
of machine time, or different types of machines. Any or all of these potential additional
factors might drive, or affect, the total amount of maintenance costs incurred by Alisha’s
manufacturing facility. If so, their inclusion in Alisha’s cost formula likely would improve
its ability to understand historical maintenance costs and predict future maintenance
costs.
E 3-38
1. Total Maintenance Cost = $1,750,000 + ($125.00 × 25,000) = $4,875,000
2. Total Fixed Maintenance Cost = $1,750,000
3. Total Variable Maintenance Cost = $125.00 × 25,000 = $3,125,000
4. Total Maintenance Cost
per Unit
= $4,875,000/25,000 units
= $195.00
5. Fixed Maintenance Cost per Unit = $1,750,000/25,000 units = $70.00
6. Variable Maintenance Cost per Unit = $125.00
7. The maintenance cost per unit in Exercise 3-38 is higher ($195) than in Exercise 3-37
($160) because Alisha incurs fixed costs of $1,750,000 to produce its stents. Assuming
25,000 and 50,000 stents are within the relevant range, Alisha’s fixed costs do not vary
with the number of stents it produces. Therefore, even though its production volume
declines by 50% (from 50,000 units down to 25,000 units), its total fixed costs remain at
$1,750,000 and are spread out over a smaller number of units. As a result, Alisha’s
maintenance costs per unit increase when its output volume decreases. It is important to
= [$1,750,000 + ($125.00 × 25,000)]/25,000 units
= [$1,750,000 + ($125.00 × 50,000)]/50,000 units
3-16
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-38 (Concluded)
realize that the opposite result occurs when output volume increases (i.e., total cost
per unit decreases as volume increases because fixed costs are spread out over a
greater number of units, again assuming the same relevant range). Finally, Alisha’s
management can consider maintenance costs per unit in certain decisions, but it
must remember that unit costs at one output level cannot be used to estimate total
costs at other output levels (again because unit costs differ across different volumes).
E 3-39
1.
The direct labor cost in the machining department is a step cost (with narrow steps).
2.
The cost of supervision for the machining department is a step cost (with wide steps).
3. Direct Labor Cost Increase = $144,000 – $108,000 = $36,000
Supervision Increase = $80,000 – $40,000 = $40,000
E 3-40
1. K
2. H
3. A
4. J
5. I
6. E
7. L
$0
$50,000
$100,000
$150,000
$200,000
$250,000
$300,000
$350,000
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
Cost of Direct Labor
Number of Units
Direct Labor Cost
$0
$50,000
$100,000
$150,000
0 1,000 2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
Cost of Supervision
Number of Units
Supervision Cost
3-17
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
A. The cost depicted in the curve in graph A is zero up to a certain level of output (i.e., up to
three squares on the output range horizontal axis). Once a certain level of output is
reached (i.e., beyond the three squares), the cost becomes VARIABLE in nature.
However, after yet another level of output is reached (i.e., about five squares), the
variable cost per unit (or rate) decreases.
B. The cost depicted in the curve in graph B is a VARIABLE cost. However, the variable
cost per unit (or rate) decreases at certain set intervals (e.g., just before the second
square and again after the fifth square). Note: This cost curve is not a semi-variable
cost because the rate of change does not change at every single unit of output, but
instead only changes after particular levels of output are reached (i.e., at certain
intervals).
C. The cost depicted in the curve in graph C is zero up to a certain level of output (i.e., up
to three squares). Once a certain level of output is reached (i.e., at three squares), the
cost becomes a VARIABLE cost. Finally, after yet another level of output is reached (i.e.,
about five squares along the horizontal axis), the cost becomes a FIXED cost in nature
(i.e., the variable component ceases).
D. The cost depicted in the curve in graph D begins as a FIXED cost. Once a certain level of
output is reached (i.e., five squares along the ouput range horizontal axis), the cost
becomes MIXED in nature (i.e., a variable component is added onto the existing fixed
component). Finally, after another level of output is reached (i.e., at eight squares), the
cost remains mixed but the variable cost per unit (or rate) increases.
E. The cost depicted in the curve in graph E is a VARIABLE cost. However, the variable
cost per unit (or rate) increases at certain set intervals (e.g., just after the fourth square
and again after the seventh square). Note: This cost curve is not a semi-variable cost
because the rate of change does not change at every single unit of output, but instead
only changes after particular levels of output are reached (i.e., at certain intervals).
F. The cost depicted in the curve in graph F is a MIXED cost. However, the rate of change
(for the variable component) increases at certain set intervals (e.g., just after the fourth
square and again after the seventh square).
G. The cost depicted in the curve in graph G begins as a SEMI-VARIABLE cost that in total
increases at a decreasing rate. However, once a certain level of output is reached (i.e.,
at eight squares along the output range horizontal axis), the cost becomes a FIXED cost.
H. The cost depicted in the curve in graph H is a STEP FUNCTION cost.
I. The cost depicted in the curve in graph I is a SEMI-VARIABLE cost that in total increases
at a decreasing rate.
J. The cost depicted in the curve in graph J is a VARIABLE cost.
K. The cost depicted in the curve in graph K is a FIXED cost.
L. The cost depicted in the curve in graph L is a SEMI-VARIABLE cost that in total increases
at an increasing rate.
E 3-41
3-18
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-42
This is a strictly variable cost.
2.
This is a fixed cost.
1.
$0
$1,000
$2,000
$3,000
$4,000
$5,000
$6,000
$7,000
$8,000
0 5 10 15 19
Cost
Number of Opening Shows
Cost of Giving Opening Shows
$0
$20,000
$40,000
$60,000
$80,000
$100,000
0 5 10 15 19
Cost
Number of Opening Shows
Cost of Running Gallery
3-19
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-42 (Concluded)
3.
This is a mixed cost.
E 3-43
1. Total Cost = $80,000 + ($500 × Number of Opening Shows)
2. Total Cost = $80,000 + ($500 × 12) = $86,000
Total Cost = $80,000 + ($500 × 14) = $87,000
$79,000
$80,000
$81,000
$82,000
$83,000
$84,000
$85,000
$86,000
$87,000
$88,000
0 5 10 15 20
Total Cost
Number of Opening Shows
Ben’s Total Costs
3-20
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-44
1. The high point is March with 3,500 appointments. The low point is May
with 1,500 appointments.
2. Variable Rate = ($2,790 – $1,790)/(3,500 – 1,500)
= $1,000/2,000 appointments
= $0.50 per tanning appointment
Using the high point:
Fixed Cost = $2,790 – ($0.50 × 3,500) = $1,040
OR
Using the low point:
Fixed Cost = $1,790 – ($0.50 × 1,500) = $1,040
3. Total Tanning Service Cost = $1,040 + ($0.50 × Number of Appointments)
4. Total Predicted Cost for September = $1,040 + ($0.50 × 2,500) = $2,290
Total Fixed Cost for September = $1,040
Total Predicted Variable Cost for September = $0.50 × 2,500 = $1,250
5. Using the high-low method means that Luisa’s estimate of the cost formula (and
therefore the cost behavior patterns) is based on only two data points and ignores
all of the other data. She should investigate to be sure that neither the high nor the
low data point are outliers that would distort the cost formula results. Also, Luisa
might be wise to calculate the cost formula 6 to 12 months later after a longer
time period has elapsed since starting the tanning business. More time, and
data, would help her judge whether the high and low points are outliers or are
representative of the typical cost behavior patterns in her tanning business.
Finally, Luisa might be wise to ensure that all of the data from the previous 8
months were collected from within the relevant range of operations, which is
important when estimating total fixed costs and variable cost per unit. For example,
in some months, the number of tanning appointments is about three times that
of other months. It appears there is significant excess tanning bed capacity in
slow months or machines are being run to their utmost capacity in busy months.
This might lead to greater machine breakdown and maintenance costs.
3-21
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-45
Yes, it appears that there is a linear relationship between tanning cost and number
of appointments.
E 3-46
1. Total Cost of Tanning Services = $1,016 + ($0.53 × Number of Appointments)
2. Total Predicted Cost for September = $1,016 + ($0.53 × 2,500) = $2,341
$0
$500
$1,000
$1,500
$2,000
$2,500
$3,000
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 2,500 3,000 3,500 4,000
Monthly Cost
Number of Appointments
Scattergraph of Tanning Services
3-22
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-47
1. Airplane depreciation:
Variable Rate = ($18,000,000 – $18,000,000)/(44,000 – 28,000) = $0
Fixed Cost = $18,000,000 – ($0 × 44,000) = $18,000,000
2. Total Cost of Airplane Depreciation = $18,000,000
Airplane depreciation is a strictly fixed cost.
3. Fuel:
Variable Rate = ($445,896,000 – $283,752,000)/(44,000 – 28,000) = $10,134
Fixed Cost = $445,896,000 – ($10,134 × 44,000) = $0
4. Total Cost of Fuel = $10,134 × (Number of Airplane Flight Hours)
Fuel is a strictly variable cost.
5. Airplane maintenance:
Variable Rate = ($15,792,000 – $11,504,000)/(44,000 – 28,000) = $268
Fixed Cost = $15,792,000 – ($268 × 44,000) = $4,000,000
6. Total cost of airplane maintenance:
$4,000,000 + ($268 × Number of Airplane Flight Hours)
Airplane maintenance is a mixed cost.
7. Total cost of each resource at 36,000 machine hours:
Total Cost of Airplane Depreciation
Total Cost of Fuel = $10,134 × 36,000
Total Cost of Airplane Maintenance = $4,000,000 + ($268 × 36,000)
= $13,648,000
= $18,000,000
= $364,824,000
3-23
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-48
1. Total Annual Cost of Airplane Depreciation = 12 × $18,000,000
= $216,000,000
Total Annual Cost of Fuel = $10,134 × (Annual Number of Airplane Flight Hours)
Total Annual Cost of Airplane Maintenance =
(12 × $4,000,000) + ($268 × Number of Airplane Flight Hours)
Note: Fixed and variable costs, based on monthly data, are computed in
Exercise 3-47.
2. Total Annual Cost of Airplane Depreciation = 12 × $18,000,000
= $216,000,000
Total Annual Cost of Fuel = $10,134 × 480,000 = $4,864,320,000
Total Annual Cost of Airplane Maintenance:
(12 × $4,000,000) + ($268 × 480,000) = $176,640,000
E 3-49
1. Total Cost of Receiving = $147,400 + ($210 × Number of Parts Inspected)
2. Independent variable—number of parts inspected
Dependent variable—total cost of receiving
Variable rate—$210 per part inspected
Fixed cost per month—$147,400
3. Total Cost of Receiving = $147,400 + ($210 × 6,800)
= $1,575,400
3-24
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-50
1. Total Annual Cost of Receiving:
= (12 × $147,400) + ($210 × Number of Parts Inspected in a Year)
= $1,768,800 + ($210 × Number of Parts Inspected in a Year)
Note: Fixed and variable costs, based on monthly data, are computed in
Exercise 3-49.
2. Total Annual Cost of Receiving = $1,768,800 + ($210 × 70,000)
= $16,468,800
E 3-51
1. Overhead cost……………… Dependent variable
$150,000…………………… Fixed cost (intercept)
$52…………………………… Variable rate (slope)
Direct labor hours………… Independent variable
2. Next Month’s Budgeted Overhead Cost = $150,000 + ($52 × 8,000)
= $566,000
3. Next Quarter’s Budgeted Overhead Cost = (3 × $150,000) + ($52 × 23,000)
= $450,000 + $1,196,000
= $1,646,000
4. Next Year’s Budgeted Overhead Cost = (12 × $150,000) + ($52 × 99,000)
= $1,800,000 + $5,148,000
= $6,948,000
3-25
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-52
1. Unit Direct Materials Cost = $80,000/20,000 units = $4.00
Unit Direct Labor Cost = $101,400/20,000 units = $5.07
Unit Variable Overhead Cost = $15,600/20,000 units = $0.78
Unit Fixed Overhead Cost = $54,600/20,000 units = $2.73
2. Unit direct materials cost………………………………………………… $ 4.00
Unit direct labor cost……………………………………………………… 5.07
Unit variable overhead cost……………………………………………… 0.78
Unit fixed overhead cost…………………………………………………… 2.73
Absorption cost per unit……………………………………………… $12.58
3. Ending Inventory in Units = 20,000 – 18,900 = 1,100 units
4. Absorption-Costing Ending Inventory = $12.58 × 1,100 units = $13,838
E 3-53
1. Unit direct materials cost ($123,000/50,000 units)…………………… $2.46
Unit direct labor cost ($93,000/50,000 units)…………………………… 1.86
Unit variable overhead cost ($65,000/50,000 units)…………………… 1.30
Variable-costing cost per unit………………………………………… $5.62
2. Variable-Costing Ending Inventory = $5.62 × (50,000 – 47,300) = $15,174
3-26
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-54
1. Unit direct materials cost……………………… $ 9.95
Unit direct labor cost…………………………… 2.75
Unit variable overhead cost…………………… 1.65
Unit fixed overhead cost………………………… 2.50
Absorption cost per unit…………………… $16.85
2. Unit direct materials cost……………………… $ 9.95
Unit direct labor cost…………………………… 2.75
Unit variable overhead cost…………………… 1.65
Variable cost per unit………………………… $14.35
3. Absorption-costing income:
Sales ($32 × 28,700)…………………………………………… $918,400
Less: Cost of goods sold ($16.85 × 28,700)……………… 483,595
Gross margin……………………………………..………… $434,805
Less:
Variable selling expense ($2 × 28,700)………………… $ 57,400
Fixed selling expense……………………………………… 65,500
Fixed administrative expense………………….………… 231,000 353,900
Operating income……………………………………………… $ 80,905
4. Variable-costing income:
Sales ($32 × 28,700)…………………………………………… $918,400
Less variable expenses:
Cost of goods sold ($14.35 × 28,700)…………………… $411,845
Selling expense ($2.00 × 28,700)……..………………… 57,400 469,245
Contribution margin……………………………….………… $449,155
Less fixed expenses:
Fixed overhead ($2.50 × 30,000)………………………… $ 75,000
Selling and administrative expenses………..………… 296,500 371,500
Operating income…………………………………..………… $ 77,655
3-27
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-55
1. SUMMARY OUTPUT
Multiple R 0.95657699
R Square 0.915039537
Adjusted R Square 0.90087946
Standard Error 27.97952866
Observations 8
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 50588.87585 50588.87585 64.62108425 0.000198083
Residual 6 4697.124145 782.8540242
Total 7 55286
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 4315.593336 158.0347739 27.30787174 1.59382E-07 3928.896176 4702.290497 3928.896176 4702.290497
DL hours 1.846241957 0.229668533 8.038724044 0.000198083 1.284263303 2.40822061 1.284263303 2.40822061
2. Overhead Cost = $4,316 + ($1.85 × Number of Direct Labor Hours)
3. The R² is 0.915, or 91.5%. In other words, 91.5% of the variation in the overhead costs from month to month
can be explained by the variability in the number of direct labor hours. Another factor (or factors) accounts
for 8.5% of the variability in monthly overhead cost. Thus, direct labor hours is a good predictor of overhead
cost. Another factor (or factors) accounts for the remaining 8.5% of overhead cost.
4. Overhead Cost = $4,316 + ($1.85 × 700) = $5,611
Regression Statistics
3-28
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
E 3-56
1. SUMMARY OUTPUT
Multiple R 0.917226463
R Square 0.841304384
Adjusted R Square 0.825434822
Standard Error 164.5461114
Observations 12
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 1435368.689 1435368.689 53.01371284 2.6597E-05
Residual 10 270754.2279 27075.42279
Total 11 1706122.917
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 942.1029802 88.16653478 10.68549402 8.62887E-07 745.6556994 1138.550261 745.6556994 1138.550261
Deliveries 1.78781384 0.245543354 7.28105163 2.6597E-05 1.240709154 2.334918525 1.240709154 2.334918525
2. Delivery Cost = $942 + ($1.79 × Number of Deliveries)
3. The R² is 0.841, or 84.1%. In other words, 84.1% of the variation in the monthly cost of delivery from month to month
can be explained by the variability in the number of deliveries. Another factor (or factors) accounts for just under 16%
of the variability in monthly delivery cost. This means that the number of deliveries is a fairly good predictor of the
cost.
4. Delivery Cost = $942 + ($1.79 × 300) = $1,479
Regression Statistics
3-29
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-57
1. a. Mixed cost
b. Variable cost
c. Variable cost
d. Step cost with narrow steps
e. Fixed cost
f. Fixed cost
g. Variable cost (assumes counter help can be called in or sent back home as the
need arises)
h. Step cost
i. Mixed cost
2. a. While the contract stays the same ($150 per month plus $15 per hour of technical
time), the company’s need for computer technical help is so stable that the same
number of hours are required each month. Now, the cost is essentially fixed.
b. The company drives the vehicles on identical trips each month. Thus, the mileage
and type of trip (highway versus in town) never vary. Now, the cost is essentially
fixed.
c. If beer is purchased in advance each day, in barrels to be tapped at night, and the
leftover beer is poured down the drain at the close of business each day, the cost
would be a step cost.
d. The college may use so much paper that it considers the cost of maintaining the
printers and copiers as essentially variable.
e. Suppose that the dental office is located in a large shopping mall that charges rent
based on the level of sales. Rent would be variable.
f. If the law office expanded and an additional, temporary receptionist was hired on
days with a heavy volume of appointments, the cost would be mixed.
g. If the individuals working behind the counter are assured that their complete shift
would be worked once they arrive, the cost would be a step cost (assumes more
counter help could be called in if demand rose).
h. If the hygienists were paid based on number of patients seen, the cost would be
variable.
i. If a company decided that the fixed amount of $15 per month was very small
relative to the total electrical bill (e.g., $500 per month), then the cost could be
viewed as variable.
PROBLEMS
3-30
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-58
a. This must be the high-low method because she has only two data points (one for
each year).
b. This is the method of least squares done on a personal computer. While it is
possible to use a personal computer to do the other methods, it is unlikely that
Francis would have gone to all the trouble of entering 60 months of data simply
to use the high-low method.
c. Ron is making a scattergraph.
d. In all probability, Lois is using the high-low method. She can do this quickly and
get some rough results in time for her meeting.
P 3-59
a. Variable cost
b. Committed fixed cost
c. Discretionary fixed cost
d. Discretionary fixed cost
e. Discretionary fixed cost
f. Variable cost
g. Variable cost
h. Discretionary fixed cost
i. Discretionary fixed cost
j. Variable cost
3-31
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-60
1.
Yes, the relationship appears to be reasonably linear.
2. Using the high-low method:
Variable Receiving Cost = ($27,000 – $15,000)/(1,700 – 700) = $12
Fixed Receiving Cost = $15,000 – ($12 × 700) = $6,600
Predicted cost for 1,450 receiving orders:
Receiving Cost = $6,600 + ($12 × 1,450) = $24,000
3. Receiving Cost for the Quarter = (3 × $6,600) + ($12 × 4,650)
= $19,800 + $55,800
= $75,600
Receiving Cost for the Year = (12 × $6,600) + ($12 × 18,000)
= $79,200 + $216,000
= $295,200
$0
$5,000
$10,000
$15,000
$20,000
$25,000
$30,000
$35,000
0 200 400 600 800 1,000 1,200 1,400 1,600 1,800
Receiving Cost
Number of Receiving Orders
Scattergraph of Receiving Activity
3-32
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-61
1. Receiving Cost = $3,212 + ($15.15 × Number of Receiving Orders)
2. Receiving Cost = $3,212 + ($15.15 × 1,450) = $25,180
3. Receiving Cost for the Quarter = (3 × $3,212) + ($15.15 × 4,650)
= $9,636 + $70,448*
= $80,084
* Rounded
Receiving Cost for the Year = (12 × $3,212) + ($15.15 × 18,000)
= $38,544 + $272,700
= $311,244
P 3-62
1. Salaries:
Senior accountant—fixed
Office assistant—fixed
Internet and software subscriptions—mixed
Consulting by senior partner—variable
Depreciation (equipment)—fixed
Supplies—mixed
Administration—fixed
Rent (offices)—fixed
Utilities—mixed
3-33
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-62 (Concluded)
2. Internet and software subscriptions:
Variable Rate = ($850 – $700)/(150 – 120) = $5
Fixed Amount = $850 – ($5 × 150) = $100
Supplies:
Variable Rate = ($1,100 – $905)/(150 – 120) = $6.50
Fixed Amount = $1,100 – ($6.50 × 150) = $125
Utilities:
Variable Rate = ($365 – $332)/(150 – 120) = $1.10
Fixed Amount = $365 – ($1.10 × 150) = $200
Unit Variable
Fixed Cost
3. Salaries:
Senior accountant…………………………………… $2,500 —
Office assistant………………………………………… 1,200 —
Internet and software subscriptions…………………… 100 $ 5.00
Consulting by senior partner…………………………… — 10.00
Depreciation (equipment)………………………………… 2,400 —
Supplies…………………………………………………… 125 6.50
Administration……………………………………………… 500 —
Rent (offices)……………………………………………… 2,000 —
Utilities……………………………………………………… 200 1.10
Total cost……………………………………………… $9,025 $22.60
Total Clinic Cost = $9,025 + ($22.60 × Professional Hours)
For 140 professional hours:
Clinic Cost = $9,025 + ($22.60 × 140) = $12,189
Charge per Hour = $12,189/140 = $87.06
Fixed Charge per Hour = $9,025/140 = $64.46
Variable Charge per Hour = $22.60
4. For 170 professional hours:
Charge per Hour = ($9,025/170) + $22.60 = $75.69
The charge drops because the fixed costs are spread over more professional
hours.
3-34
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-63
1. Committed resource charges: monthly fee, activation fee, cancellation fee
(if triggered by contract cancellation prior to 1 year)
Flexible resource charges: all additional charges for airtime, long distance,
and roaming.
2. Plan 1:
= +
60 minutes = 45 minutes + 15 minutes
Plan 2:
= +
120 minutes = 45 minutes + 75 minutes
Plan 1 is more cost effective. Jana will have some unused capacity (on
average, 15 minutes a month), and the overall cost will be lower by $10 per
month.
3. Plan 1:*
= +
60 minutes = 90 minutes + (30) minutes
= +
60 minutes = 60 minutes + 0 minutes
Additional Minutes = 30 minutes
* There are a number of ways to illustrate the use of minutes with Plan 1. Here are two
possibilities. The problem, of course, is that all included monthly minutes are used and Jana
must purchase additional minutes.
Plan 2:
= +
120 minutes = 90 minutes + 30 minutes
Plan 2 is now more cost effective, as the monthly cost is $30. Under Plan 1,
Jana will pay $20 plus $30 (30 minutes × $1.00) per month. (The $1.00
additional charge includes the airtime and regional roaming charge.)
4. Results of students’ analyses will vary.
Minutes Available Minutes Used Unused Minutes
Minutes Available Minutes Used Unused Minutes
Minutes Available Minutes Used Unused Minutes
Minutes Available Minutes Used Unused Minutes
Minutes Available Minutes Used Unused Minutes
3-35
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-64
1. Variable costs—salary of the two paralegals times the percentage of time spent in
processing uncontested claims; salary of the accountant times the percentage of time
spent in this activity; cost of claims forms, checks, envelopes, and postage.
Fixed costs—salaries of the two paralegals times the percentage of time spent in
handling contested claims; depreciation on office equipment used in claims processing
activity.
2. The independent variable is number of claims; the dependent variable is cost of claims
processing.
3. The low point is March with $31,260 cost and 4,900 claims; the high point is June with
$44,895 cost and 7,930 claims.
Variable Rate = ($44,895 – $31,260)/(7,930 – 4,900)
= $13,635/3,030 claims
= $4.50 per claim
Using the high point:
Fixed Cost = $44,895 – ($4.50 × 7,930) = $9,210
Total Cost of Claims Processing = $9,210 + ($4.50 × Claims)
4. Cost of Outsourcing = $4.60 × 75,600 = $347,760
Cost of Processing In-House = (12 × $9,210) + ($4.50 × 75,600)
= $110,520 + $340,200
= $450,720
Tiffany should outsource the claims processing for a savings of $102,960
($450,720 – $347,760).
3-36
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-65
1. The state unemployment insurance premiums and the average cost per injury are fixed
with respect to the number of speakers sold. The state unemployment insurance
premiums are variable (to an extent) with respect to the number of injury claims. That is,
over a certain base premium, the premium increases as the number of injuries
increases. The average cost per injury is variable with respect to the number of serious
versus nonserious injuries incurred. However, Kicker’s experience was that serious
injuries could be reduced through education and changes in dangerous practices.
The number of speakers sold was not relevant.
2. Yes, the safety program paid for itself. There was a $50,000 reduction in annual cost of
state unemployment insurance premiums and a $22,000 reduction in the total cost of
injuries per year [$22,500 ($1,500 × 15) – $500 ($50 × 10)]. This is a monetary reduction
of $72,000 per year versus the $60,000 salary of the safety director. In addition, the
number of workdays lost went from 30 to 0, and the number of serious injuries went
from 4 to 0. While these reductions were not quantified (outside the average injury cost),
they are important and are considered a benefit of the safety program.
3-37
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-66
1. Direct materials……………………….………………… $2.85
Direct labor……………………….……………………… 1.92
Variable overhead……………………….……………… 1.60
Fixed overhead ($180,000/200,000 units)…………… 0.90
Total……………………….…………………………… $7.27
Per-unit inventory cost on the balance sheet is $7.27.
Units in Ending Inventory = 8,200 units + 200,000 units – 204,300 units
= 3,900 units
Total Ending Inventory = $7.27 × 3,900 units = $28,353
2. Absorption-costing income:
Sales (204,300 units × $9)…….………….……………….………….… $1,838,700
Less: Cost of goods sold (204,300 units × $7.27)………………… 1,485,261
Gross margin………………………………………………………… $ 353,439
Less: Selling and administrative expenses……………………….… 279,870
Operating income…………………………………….……………… $ 73,569
3. Direct materials……………………….………………… $2.85
Direct labor……………………….……………………… 1.92
Variable overhead……………………….……………… 1.60
Total……………………….…………………………… $6.37
Per-unit inventory cost under variable costing equals $6.37.
This differs from the per-unit inventory cost in Requirement 1 because the
balance sheet is for external use and reflects absorption costing. Variable
costing does not include per-unit fixed overhead. Also, the difference
between the number of units produced versus sold, multiplied by the
fixed overhead per unit, equals the difference in operating income
between absorption and variable costing income statements.
4. Variable-costing income:
Sales (204,300 units × $9)…….………….……………….………….… $1,838,700
Less variable expenses:
Variable cost of goods sold (204,300 units × $6.37)…………… 1,301,391
Variable selling and administrative (204,300 units × $0.90)… 183,870
Contribution margin……………………………………………………… $ 353,439
Less fixed expenses:
Fixed overhead…………………………………………….………… 180,000
Fixed selling and administrative…………………………………… 96,000
Operating income………………………………………………………… $ 77,439
3-38
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-66 (Continued)
5. Absorption-costing income:
Sales (196,700 units × $9)……………………………………………… $1,770,300
Less: Cost of goods sold (196,700 units × $7.27)…………………… 1,430,009
Gross margin……………………………………………………………… $ 340,291
Less: Selling and administrative expenses……………………………… 273,030
Operating income…………………………………………………………… $ 67,261
Variable-costing income:
Sales (196,700 units × $9)……………………………………………… $1,770,300
Less variable expenses:
Variable cost of goods sold (196,700 units × $6.37)……………… 1,252,979
Variable selling and administrative (196,700 units × $0.90)……… 177,030
Contribution margin………………………………….……………………… $ 340,291
Less fixed expenses:
Fixed overhead…………………………………………………………… 180,000
Fixed selling and administrative………………………………….…… 96,000
Operating income…………………………………..………………………… $ 64,291
3-39
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-67
1. Results of regressions:
10 Months’ 12 Months’
Data Data
Intercept…………………… 3,212 3,820
Slope………………………… 15.15 15.10
R²…………………………… 0.85 0.75
2.
The regression run on the 11 months of data from “typical” months appears to be better
than the one for all 12 months. R² is higher for the regression without the outlier
(85.88% versus 74.51%), and the scattergraph gives Tracy confidence that the data
without the outlier describe a relatively linear relationship. Since the storm damage
is not expected to recur, Month 11 can safely be dropped from a regression meant to
help predict future receiving cost.
The point for the 11th month (1,200 receiving orders and $28,000 total receiving cost)
appears to be an outlier. Since the cost was so much higher in this month due to an
event that is not expected to happen again, this data point could easily be dropped.
Then, data from the 11 remaining months could be used to develop a cost formula
for receiving cost.
$0
$5,000
$10,000
$15,000
$20,000
$25,000
$30,000
$35,000
0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000
Receiving Cost
Number of Receiving Orders
Scattergraph of Receiving Activity—12 Month’s Data
3-40
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-67 (Concluded)
3. Results for the method of least squares after dropping Month 11.
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.926737002
R Square 0.85884147
Adjusted R Square 0.843157189
Standard Error 2051.780599
Observations 11
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 230520858.3 230520858.3 54.75810248 4.10397E-05
Residual 9 37888232.62 4209803.625
Total 10 268409090.9
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 3168.559746 2565.261709 1.235179917 0.248035426 -2634.465393 8971.584884 -2634.465393 8971.584884
Receiving Orders 15.17946388 2.051314444 7.399871788 4.10397E-05 10.53906823 19.81985953 10.53906823 19.81985953
Receiving Cost = $3,169 + ($15.18 × Number of Receiving Orders)
Predicted Receiving Cost for a Month = $3,169 + ($15.18 × 1,450) = $25,180
3-41
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-68
1.
The overall relationship looks reasonably linear—although the data point for the first
quarter may be an outlier.
2. Using the high-low method:
Variable Power Cost = ($42,500 – $29,000)/(30,000 – 18,000) = $1.125
Fixed Power Cost = $42,500 – ($1.125 × 30,000) = $8,750
Total Power Cost = $8,750 + ($1.125 × Number of Machine Hours)
$0
$5,000
$10,000
$15,000
$20,000
$25,000
$30,000
$35,000
$40,000
$45,000
0 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000
Cost of Power
Number of Machine Hours
Scattergraph of Power Cost
3-42
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-68 (Continued)
3. Output of regression program:
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.893359672
R Square 0.798091504
Adjusted R Square 0.764440088
Standard Error 2673.924883
Observations 8
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 169569504.3 169569504.3 23.71643159 0.002794513
Residual 6 42899245.69 7149874.282
Total 7 212468750
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 6899.784483 5910.387735 1.167399635 0.287338538 -7562.413284 21361.98225 -7562.413284 21361.98225
Machine Hours 1.209051724 0.248267693 4.869951909 0.002794513 0.601562566 1.816540883 0.601562566 1.816540883
Total Power Cost = $6,900 + ($1.21 × Number of Machine Hours)
R² is 0.798, or 79.8%. This is not bad; however, a little more than 20% of the variance in the dependent variable
(power cost) is not explained by the independent variable (machine hours).
3-43
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-68 (Concluded)
4. The output of a regression program after Quarter 1 (20,000, $26,000) has been dropped.
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.957883502
R Square 0.917540803
Adjusted R Square 0.901048964
Standard Error 1367.284823
Observations 7
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 104009803.9 104009803.9 55.63605034 0.000683462
Residual 5 9347338.936 1869467.787
Total 6 113357142.9
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 12407.56303 3289.994132 3.771302479 0.013005506 3950.363873 20864.76218 3950.363873 20864.76218
Machine Hours 1.009803922 0.135381371 7.458957725 0.000683462 0.661795029 1.357812814 0.661795029 1.357812814
Total Power Cost = $12,408 + ($1.01 × Number of Machine Hours)
This regression looks better in terms of R². The R² for this regression is 0.92, or 92%. By dropping the outlier, the
explanatory power of machine hours is much improved. However, the controller should first carefully examine Quarter 1
to see what the reason was for the lower than expected power cost. If the explanation is that something occurred that is
not expected to reoccur, then the point can be dropped. If the reason is one that is expected to reoccur, then that needs
to be factored into the controller’s judgment about power costs.
3-44
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-69
1. The scattergraph provides evidence for a linear relationship, but the observation for
300 moves may be an outlier.
2. High (800, $14,560); Low (100, $3,000)
Variable Rate = ($14,560 – $3,000)/(800 – 100)
= $11,560/700 moves
= $16.514
* Variable rate rounded to three decimal places.
Fixed Rate Cost = $3,000 – ($16.514 × 100)
= $3,000 – $1,651.40
= $1,349
** Total fixed cost rounded to the nearest dollar.
Total Cost = $1,349 + ($16.514 × Number of Moves)
= $1,349 + ($16.514 × 550)
= $10,432
*** Total cost rounded to the nearest dollar.
$0
$2,000
$4,000
$6,000
$8,000
$10,000
$12,000
$14,000
$16,000
0 500 1,000
Cost
Number of Moves
Cost of Moving Materials
*
**
***
3-45
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-69 (Continued)
3. Output of the regression routine calculated by a spreadsheet:
SUMMARY OUTPUT
Regression Statistics
Multiple R 0.96785846
R Square 0.936749999
Adjusted R Square 0.926208332
Standard Error 1266.703399
Observations 8
ANOVA
df SS MS F Significance F
Regression 1 142581862.5 142581862.5 88.86165795 8.10236E-05
Residual 6 9627225 1604537.5
Total 7 152209087.5
Coefficients Standard Error t Stat P-value Lower 95% Upper 95% Lower 95.0% Upper 95.0%
Intercept 497.5 987.0073364 0.504048938 0.63219637 -1917.619944 2912.619944 -1917.619944 2912.619944
Number of Moves 18.425 1.954565778 9.426646167 8.10236E-05 13.64234984 23.20765016 13.64234984 23.20765016
Rounding the coefficients:
Variable Rate = $18.43 per move
Fixed Rate = $498
Total Cost = $498 + ($18.43 × Number of Moves)
= $498 + ($18.43 × 550) = $10,635
R² = 0.94 (rounded)
This says that 94% of the variability in the cost of moving materials is explained by the number of moves.
3-46
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
P 3-69 (Concluded)
4. Normally, we would prefer the least squares method since the data appear to be linear.
However, the third observation may be an outlier. If the third observation (300 moves
and $3,400 of cost) is dropped, the R² rises to 99%. The new cost formula would be:
Total Cost = $1,411 + ($17.28 × Number of Moves)
The higher fixed cost is much more in keeping with what we observed with the
scattergraph in Requirement 1.
3-47
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
Case 3-70
1. The order should cover the variable costs described in the cost formulas.
These variable costs represent flexible resources.
Materials ($94 × 20,000)……………………………………………………… $1,880,000
Labor ($16 × 20,000)…………………………………………………………… 320,000
Variable overhead ($80 × 20,000)…………………………………………… 1,600,000
Variable selling ($7 × 20,000)………………………………………………… 140,000
Total additional resource spending……………………………….……… $3,940,000
Divided by units produced…………………………………….…………… 2 0,000
Total unit variable cost…………………………………………………… $ 197
Garner should accept the order because it would cover total variable costs
and increase income by $15 per unit ($212 – $197) for a total increase of
$300,000.
2. The coefficients of determination indicate the reliability of the cost formulas.
Of the four formulas, overhead activity may be a problem. A coefficient of
determination of 0.56 means that only about 56% of the variability of
overhead cost is explained by direct labor hours. This should have a bearing
on the answer to Requirement 1 because if the percentage is low, there are
activity drivers other than direct labor hours that are affecting variability in
overhead cost. What these drivers are and how resource spending would
change need to be known before a sound decision can be made.
3. Resource spending attributable to order:
Materials ($94 × 20,000)…………………………………………….………… $1,880,000
Labor ($16 × 20,000)…….…………………………………….…..…………… 320,000
Variable overhead:
($85 × 20,000)……………….……………………………….……………… 1,700,000
($5,000 × 12)…………………………….…………………………………… 60,000
($300 × 600)……………………………..……………………..…………… 180,000
Variable selling ($7 × 20,000)…………………………………….………… 140,000
Total additional resource spending………………………………………… $4,280,000
Divided by units produced…………………………………………………… 2 0,000
Total unit variable cost………………………………………..………… $ 214
The order would not be accepted now because it does not cover the variable
activity costs. Each unit would lose $2 ($214 – $212).
CASES
3-48
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 3 Cost Behavior and Forecasting
Case 3-70 (Concluded)
It would also be useful to know the step-cost functions for any activities that have
resources acquired in advance of usage on a short-term basis. It is possible that
there may not be enough unused activity capacity to handle the special order, and
resource spending may also be affected by a need (which, in this case, would be
unexpected) to expand activity capacity.
Case 3-71
1. Carl’s behavior is definitely unethical. He is stealing confidential information from
Kilborn and using it for unethical advantages. Kilborn would not approve of Carl’s
actions and would have a potential lawsuit against him for theft of information.
2. Assuming that the data were acquired illicitly, Bill’s instincts were on target. To hire
Carl in implicit exchange for the confidential information would be a violation of
integrity. As soon as Carl joined Brindon’s staff, Kilborn could have legal standing
to include the Thomas Electronics Division in any suit against Carl. Not only are
Carl’s actions in violation of Kilborn’s code of conduct, but they should also be
against the Thomas Electronics Division’s code of conduct. Finally, Bill should
remember that Carl is basically a disloyal employee. If he is willing to act against
the best interests of his former employer, he will certainly be willing to act against
the best interests of his current and future employers.
3-49
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

BASIC MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS

1. Cost is the amount of cash or cash equivalent sacrificed for goods and/or services that are
expected to bring a current or future benefit to the organization. An expense is an expired cost;
the benefit has been used up.
2. Accumulating costs is the way that costs are measured and recorded. Assigning costs is linking
costs to some cost object. For example, a company accumulates or tracks costs by entering
them into the general ledger accounts. Direct materials would be entered into the materials
account; direct labor would be entered into the direct labor account. Then, these costs are
assigned to units of product.
3. A cost object is something for which you want to know the cost. For example, a cost object may be
the human resources department of a company. The costs related to that cost object might include
salaries of employees of that department, telephone costs for that department, and depreciation on
office equipment. Another example is a customer group of a company. Atlantic City and Las Vegas
casinos routinely treat heavy gamblers to free rooms, food, and drink. The casino owners know the
benefits yielded by these high rollers and need to know the costs of keeping them happy, such as
the opportunity cost of lost revenue from the rooms, the cost of the food, and so on.
4. A direct cost is one that can be traced to the cost object, typically by physical observation. An
indirect cost cannot be traced easily and accurately to the cost object. The same cost can be direct
for one purpose and indirect for another. For example, the salaries paid to purchasing department
employees in a factory are a direct cost to the purchasing department but an indirect cost
(overhead) to units of product.
5. Allocation means that an indirect cost is assigned to a cost object using a reasonable and
convenient method. Since no causal relationship exists, allocating indirect costs is based on
convenience or some assumed linkage.
6. A product is tangible in that you can see, feel, and take it with you. Examples of products include a
tube of toothpaste, a car, or an orange. A service is a task or an activity performed for a customer.
For example, the dental hygienist who cleans your teeth provides a service.
7. Manufacturing overhead includes all product costs other than direct materials and direct labor. It is
because the remaining manufacturing (product) costs are gathered into one category that
overhead is often thought of as a “catchall.”
8. Direct materials purchases are first entered into the materials inventory. They may or may not be
used during the month. Only when the materials are withdrawn from inventory for use in production
are they known as “direct materials.”
9. Prime cost is the sum of direct materials and direct labor. Conversion cost is the sum of direct
labor and overhead. Total product cost consists of direct materials, direct labor, and overhead.
This is not equal to the sum of prime cost and conversion cost because then direct labor would
be double counted.
2 BASIC MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
2-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
10. A period cost is one that is expensed immediately, rather than being inventoried like a product
cost.
11. Selling cost is the cost of selling and delivering products and services. Examples include free
samples, advertising, sponsorship of sporting events, commissions on sales, and the
depreciation on delivery trucks (such as Coca-Cola or Pepsi trucks).
12. The cost of goods manufactured is the sum of direct materials, direct labor, and overhead used in
producing the units completed during the current period and transferred to finished goods
inventory.
13. The cost of goods manufactured is the cost of direct materials, direct labor, and overhead for the
units produced (completed) during a time period. The cost of goods sold is the cost of direct
materials, direct labor, and overhead for the units sold during a time period. The number of units
produced is not necessarily equal to the number of units sold during a period. For example, a
company may produce 1,000 pairs of jeans in a month but sell only 900 pairs.
14. The income statement for a manufacturing firm includes the cost of goods sold, which is the sum
of direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. The income statement for a service
firm contains no cost of goods sold because there is no product to purchase or to manufacture
and, thus, there is no inventory account to expense as cost of goods sold. In addition, because
there is no cost of goods sold on the income statement of a service firm, there is no gross margin,
unlike a manufacturing firm.
15. The percentage column on the income statement gives some insight into the relative spending
on the various expense categories. These percentages can then be compared with those of other
firms in the same industry to see if the company’s spending appears to be in line or out of line with
the experiences of others. These percentages can also be compared to prior periods of the
company for variance analysis.
2-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
2-1. c
2-2. d
2-3. b Conversion Cost per Unit = $6 + $19 = $25
2-4. b Sales = $75 × 2,000 units = $150,000
Production Cost per Unit = $15 + $6 + $19 = $40
Cost of Goods Sold = $40 × 2,000 = $80,000
Gross Margin = $150,000 – $80,000 = $70,000
2-5. e
2-6. d
2-7. c
2-8. d
2-9. b
2-10. a
2-11. e Prime Cost per Unit = $8.65 + $1.10 = $9.75
2-12. b
2-13. a Total Prime Cost = $50,000 + $20,000 = $70,000
Prime Cost per Unit = $70,000/10,000 units = $7.00
2-14. c Total Conversion Cost = $20,000 + $130,000 = $150,000
Conversion Cost per Unit = $150,000/10,000 units = $15.00
2-15. b Cost of Goods Sold = $50,000 + $20,000 + $130,000 = $200,000
Cost of Goods Sold per Unit = $200,000/10,000 units = $20.00
2-16. b Sales = $31 × 10,000 = $310,000
Gross Margin = $310,000 – $200,000 = $110,000
Gross Margin per Unit = $110,000/10,000 units = $11.00
2-17. c Period Expense = $40,000 + $36,000 = $76,000
2-18. a Operating Income = $310,000 – $200,000 – $76,000 = $34,000
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
2-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-19
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $ 32,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 28,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 60,000
Total product cost……………………………………………… $120,000
2. Per-Unit Product Cost = $120,000 = $240
500 units
Therefore, one hockey stick costs $240 to produce.
BE 2-20
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $32,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 28,000
Total prime cost………………………………………………… $60,000
2. Per-Unit Prime Cost = $60,000 = $120
500 units
3. Direct labor………………………………………………………… $28,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 60,000
Total conversion cost…………………………………………… $88,000
4. Per-Unit Conversion Cost = $88,000 = $176
500 units
BE 2-21
Materials inventory, June 1…………………………………………………………… $ 48,000
Purchases………………………………………………………………………………… 132,000
Materials inventory, June 30…………………………………………………………… (45,000)
Direct materials used in production………………………………………………… $135,000
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET A
2-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-22
1. Direct materials*……………………………………………………………… $135,000
Direct labor……………………………………………………………………… 113,000
Manufacturing overhead……………………………………………………… 187,000
Total manufacturing cost for June………………………………………… $435,000
Work in process, June 1………………………………………………… 65,000
Work in process, June 30………………………………………………… (63,000)
Cost of goods manufactured………………………………………………… $437,000
* Direct Materials = $48,000 + $132,000 – $45,000 = $135,000
[This was calculated in Brief Exercise 2-21.]
2. Per-Unit Cost of Goods Manufactured = = $230
BE 2-23
1.
Cost of goods manufactured………………………………….…………… $437,000
Finished goods inventory, June 1…………………………………….…… 80,000
Finished goods inventory, June 30…………………………………….…… (84,000)
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………………… $433,000
2. Number of units sold:
Finished goods inventory, June 1…………………………………….…… 350
Units finished during June………………………………………….……… 1,900
Finished goods inventory, June 30…………………………………….…… (370)
Units sold during June……………………………………………….……… 1,880
For the Month of June
$437,000
1,900 units
Slapshot Company
Cost of Goods Sold Statement
2-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-24
Sales revenue (1,880 × $400)……………………………………… $752,000
Cost of goods sold ……………………………………..…………… 433,000
Gross margin……………………………………………………… $319,000
Less:
Selling expense:
Commissions (0.10 × $752,000)…………………………… $75,200
Fixed selling expense ………………….…………………… 65,000 140,200
Administrative expense ………………………………………… 53,800
Operating income…………………………………..………… $125,000
BE 2-25
Percent*
Sales revenue (1,880 × $400)………………………… $752,000 100.0
Cost of goods sold …………………………………… 433,000 57.6
Gross margin……………………………………… $319,000 42.4
Less:
Selling expense:
Variable commissions (0.10 × $752,000)…… $75,200
Fixed selling expense………………………… 65,000 140,200 18.6
Administrative expense…………………………… 53,800 7.2
Operating income…………………………….. $125,000 16.6
* Steps in calculating the percentages (the percentages are rounded):
1. Sales Revenue Percent = $752,000/$752,000 = 1.00, or 100% (sales revenue is
always 100% of sales revenue)
2. Cost of Goods Sold Percent = $433,000/$752,000 = 0.576, or 57.6%
3. Gross Margin Percent = $319,000/$752,000 = 0.424, or 42.4%
4. Selling Expense Percent = $140,200/$752,000 = 0.186, or 18.6%
5. Administrative Expense Percent = $53,800/$752,000 = 0.072, or 7.2%
6. Operating Income Percent = $125,000/$752,000 = 0.166, or 16.6%
Slapshot Company
Income Statement
For the Month of June
Slapshot Company
Income Statement
For the Month of June
2-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-26
1.
Sales revenues………………………………………………… $410,000
Less operating expenses:
Sales commissions……………………………………… $ 50,000
Technology………………………………………………… 75,000
Research and development……………………………… 200,000
Selling expenses…………………………………………… 10,000
Administrative expenses ………………………………… 35,000 370,000
Operating income………………………………………… $ 40,000
2. Allstar has no cost of goods sold line item because the company is a service
provider, rather than a manufacturer. Therefore, as a service provider, Allstar has no
inventory costs (raw materials, work in process, or finished goods) to flow through
to cost of goods sold when it recognizes its sales revenue. Instead, all of the costs
it incurs in providing advertising services appear as operating expenses on the
income statement.
For the Past Month
Allstar Exposure
Income Statement
2-7
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-27
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $100,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 18,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 50,000
Total product cost……………………………………………… $168,000
2. Per-Unit Product Cost = $168,000 = $84
2,000 units
Therefore, one coffee maker costs $84 to produce.
BE 2-28
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $100,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 18,000
Total prime cost………………………………………………… $118,000
2. Per-Unit Prime Cost = $118,000 = $59
2,000 units
3. Direct labor………………………………………………………… $18,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 50,000
Total conversion cost…………………………………………… $68,000
4. Per-Unit Conversion Cost = $68,000 = $34
2,000 units
BE 2-29
Materials inventory, March 1…………………………………………………………… $ 25,000
Purchases………………………………………………………………………………… 350,000
Materials inventory, March 31………………………………………………………… (40,000)
Direct materials used in production………………………………………………… $335,000
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET B
2-8
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-30
1. Direct materials*……………………………………………………………… $335,000
Direct labor……………………………………………………………………… 74,000
Manufacturing overhead……………………………………………………… 190,000
Total manufacturing cost for March……………………………………… $599,000
Work in process, March 1………………………………………………… 55,000
Work in process, March 31……………………………………………… (46,500)
Cost of goods manufactured………………………………………………… $607,500
* Direct Materials = $25,000 + $350,000 – $40,000 = $335,000
[This was calculated in Brief Exercise 2-29.]
2. Per-Unit Cost of Goods Manufactured = = $75
BE 2-31
1.
Cost of goods manufactured………………………………….…………… $607,500
Finished goods inventory, March 1…………………………………….… 70,000
Finished goods inventory, March 31…………………………………….… (65,000)
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………………… $612,500
2. Number of units sold:
Finished goods inventory, March 1…………………………………….… 1,000
Units finished during March………………………………………….……… 8,100
Finished goods inventory, March 31…………………………………….… (1,100)
Units sold during March……………………………………………….……… 8,000
$607,500
8,100 units
Morning Smiles Coffee Company
Cost of Goods Sold Statement
For the Month of March
2-9
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-32
Sales revenue (8,000 × $100)……………………………………… $800,000
Cost of goods sold ……………………………………..…………… 612,500
Gross margin……………………………………………………… $187,500
Less:
Selling expense:
Variable commissions (0.05 × $800,000)………………… $40,000
Fixed selling expense ………………….…………………… 45,000 85,000
Administrative expense ………………………………………… 47,500
Operating income…………………………………..………… $ 55,000
BE 2-33
Percent*
Sales revenue (8,000 × $100)………………………… $800,000 100.0
Cost of goods sold …………………………………… 612,500 76.6
Gross margin……………………………………… $187,500 23.4
Less:
Selling expense:
Variable commissions (0.05 × $800,000)…… $40,000
Fixed selling expense………………………… 45,000 85,000 10.6
Administrative expense………………………… 47,500 5.9
Operating income…………………………….. $ 55,000 6.9
* Steps in calculating the percentages (the percentages are rounded):
1. Sales Revenue Percent = $800,000/$800,000 = 1.00, or 100% (sales revenue is
always 100% of sales revenue)
2. Cost of Goods Sold Percent = $612,500/$800,000 = 0.766, or 76.6%
3. Gross Margin Percent = $187,500/$800,000 = 0.234, or 23.4%
4. Selling Expense Percent = $85,000/$800,000 = 0.106, or 10.6%
5. Administrative Expense Percent = $47,500/$800,000 = 0.059, or 5.9%
6. Operating Income Percent = $55,000/$800,000 = 0.069, or 6.9%
For the Month of March
Morning Smiles Coffee Company
Income Statement
For the Month of March
Morning Smiles Coffee Company
Income Statement
2-10
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
BE 2-34
1.
Sales revenues………………………………………………… $200,000
Less operating expenses:
Technology………………………………………………… $ 10,000
Wages expense…………………………………………… 100,000
Rent expense……………………………………………… 15,000
Selling (advertising) expenses………………………… 5,000
Administrative expenses ………………………………… 20,000 150,000
Operating income………………………………………… $ 50,000
2. Healing Hands has no cost of goods sold line item because the company is a service
provider (i.e., of massage therapy activities), rather than a manufacturer. Therefore,
as a service provider, Healing Hands has no inventory costs (raw materials, work in
process, or finished goods) to flow through to cost of goods sold when it recognizes
its sales revenue. Instead, all of the costs it incurs in providing massage and other
beauty services appear as operating expenses on the income statement.
Healing Hands Massage Hut
Income Statement
For the Past Month
2-11
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-35
1. Salaries
Derek………………………………………………………… $25,000 $6,000
Lawanna……………………………………………………… 30,000 1,500
Total……………………………………………………… $55,000 $7,500
2. All of Derek’s time is spent selling, so all of his salary cost is selling cost.
Lawanna spends two-thirds of her time selling, so $20,000 ($30,000 × 2/3) of
her salary is selling cost. The remainder is administrative cost. All commissions
are selling costs.
Selling Administrative
Costs
Derek’s salary……………………………………………… $25,000 —
Lawanna’s salary…………………………………………… 20,000 $10,000
Derek’s commissions……………………………………… 6,000 —
Lawanna’s commissions………………………………… 1,500 —
Total……………………………………………………… $52,500 $10,000
E 2-36
1. The two products that Holmes sells are playhouses and the installation of
playhouses. The playhouse itself is a product, and the installation is a service.
2. Holmes could assign the costs to production and to installation, but if the
installation is a minor part of its business, it probably does not go to the trouble.
3. The opportunity cost of the installation process is the loss of the playhouses that
could have been built by the two workers who were pulled off the production line.
Costs
Cost Commissions
EXERCISES
Cost
2-12
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-37
a. Salary of cell supervisor—Direct
b. Power to heat and cool the plant in which the cell is located—Indirect
c. Materials used to produce the motors—Direct
d. Maintenance for the cell’s equipment—Indirect
e. Labor used to produce motors—Direct
f. Cafeteria that services the plant’s employees—Indirect
g. Depreciation on the plant—Indirect
h. Depreciation on equipment used to produce the motors—Direct
i. Ordering costs for materials used in production—Indirect
j. Engineering support—Indirect
k. Cost of maintaining the plant and grounds—Indirect
l. Cost of the plant’s personnel office—Indirect
m. Property tax on the plant and land—Indirect
E 2-38
1. Direct materials—Product cost
Direct labor—Product cost
Manufacturing overhead—Product cost
Selling expense—Period cost
2. Direct materials………………………………………………………………… $ 7,000
Direct labor……………………………………………………………………… 3,000
Manufacturing overhead……………………………………………………… 2,000
Total product cost………………………………………………………… $12,000
3. Unit Product Cost = $12,000 = $3.00
4,000 units
2-13
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-39
1.
Direct Direct Manufact. Selling
Materials Labor Overhead Expense
Direct materials………………… $216,000
Factory rent……………………… $ 24,000
Direct labor……………………… $120,000
Factory utilities………………… 6,300
Supervision in the factory…… 50,000
Indirect labor in the
factory………………………… 30,000
Depreciation on factory
equipment……………………… 9,000
Sales commissions…………… $ 27,000
Sales salaries…………………… 65,000
Advertising……………………… 37,000
Depreciation on the
headquarters building……… $ 10,000
Salary of the corporate
receptionist…………………… 30,000
Other administrative costs…… 175,000
Salary of the factory
receptionist…………………… 28,000
Totals………………………… $216,000 $120,000 $147,300 $129,000 $215,000
2. Direct materials…………………………………………………………………… $216,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………………………… 120,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………………………… 147,300
Total product cost……………………………………………………………… $483,300
3. Total Period Cost = $129,000 + $215,000 = $344,000
Costs Expense
Product Cost Period Cost
4. Unit Product Cost = $483,300
30,000 units = $16.11
Administrative
2-14
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-40
Direct Direct Manufact.
Materials Labor Overhead
Jars……………………………………………………… X
Sugar…………………………………………………… X
Fruit…………………………………………………… X
Pectin…………………………………………………… X
Boxes…………………………………………………… X
Depreciation on the factory building……………… X
Cooking equipment operators’ wages…………… X
Filling equipment operators’ wages……………… X
Packers’ wages……………………………………… X
Janitors’ wages……………………………………… X
Receptionist’s wages………………………………… X
Telephone……………………………………………… X
Utilities………………………………………………… X
Rental of Santa Claus suit………………………… X
Supervisory labor salaries………………………… X
Insurance on factory building……………………… X
Depreciation on factory equipment……………… X
Oil to lubricate filling equipment………………… X
E 2-41
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $400,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 80,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 320,000
Total product cost……………………………………………… $800,000
2.
$800,000
4,000 units
Costs
Total Product Cost
Product Cost per Unit = Number of Units
= = $200.00
2-15
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-42
1. Direct materials…………………………………………………………………… $400,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………………………… 80,000
Total prime cost…………………………………………………………………… $480,000
=
3. Direct labor………………………………………………………………………… $ 80,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………………………… 320,000
Total conversion cost………………………………………………………… $400,000
$400,000
4,000 units
= $100.00
E 2-43
1. Materials inventory, June 1……………………………………………………… $ 3,700
Materials purchases in June…………………………………………………… 15,500
Materials inventory, June 30…………………………………………………… (1,600)
Direct materials used in June……………………………………………… $17,600
2. As shown in the exercise, the cost of direct materials purchased in June is $15,500.
Also, as calculated in response to Requirement 1, the cost of direct materials used
in production in June is $17,600. Therefore, in this case, the cost of direct materials
used is greater than the cost of direct material purchased, which means that—for
whatever reason—Hannah Banana Bakers decided to let its ending inventory (of
$1,600) drop below its beginning inventory (of $3,700). The difference in beginning
and ending inventories ($3,700 – $1,600 = $2,100) accounts for the difference
between the cost of direct materials purchased and the cost of direct materials
used in production (also $2,100; or $17,600 – $15,500). Hannah might have elected
to let its ending materials inventory drop in order to save cash for purchases other
than buying materials inventory. Also, it might have elected to do so to reduce its
materials inventory holding costs (e.g., inspection, handling, insurance, etc.).
Furthermore, Hannah might have reduced its ending materials inventory because
it foresaw that demand in July would be lower than in June and did not want to be
left holding additional inventory at the end of July. Alternately, Hannah might have
experienced stronger than expected sales in June and used more direct materials
in production than it had anticipated when purchasing materials. Regardless of the
reason, it is helpful for students to understand the relationship between the cost of
materials purchased versus the cost of materials used in production in a given
period.
2. Prime Cost per Unit =
Total Conversion Cost
Number of Units
Total Prime Cost
Number of Units
$120.00
$480,000
4,000 units
=
4. Conversion Cost per Unit =
=
2-16
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-44
1. Finished goods inventory, January 1………………………………… 6,800
Units completed during the year……………………………………… 94,000
Finished goods inventory, December 31……………………………… (7,200)
Units sold……………………………………………………………… 93,600
2. Units sold…………………………………………………………………… 93,600
× Unit cost………………………………………………………………… $2,200
Cost of goods sold……………………………………………………
E 2-45
1. Materials inventory, September 1………………………………………… $ 120,000
Materials purchases in September………………………………………… 200,000
Materials inventory, September 30………………………………………… (130,000)
Direct materials used in September…………………………………… $ 190,000
2. Direct materials……………………………………………………………… $190,000
Direct labor…………………………………………………………………… 120,000
Manufacturing overhead…………………………………………………… 325,000
Total manufacturing cost……………………………………………… $635,000
3. Total manufacturing cost…………………………………………………… $635,000
Add: Work in process, September 1……………………………………… 80,000
Less: Work in process, September 30…………………………………… (90,000)
Cost of goods manufactured…………………………………………… $625,000
E 2-46
Cost of goods manufactured*…………………………………………………… $625,000
Finished goods, September 1…………………………………………………… 70,000
Finished goods, September 30………………………………………………… (65,000)
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………………… $630,000
* See solution to Exercise 2-45.
E 2-47
Direct materials…………………………………………………………………… $180,000
Direct labor………………………………………………………………………… 505,000
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………………………… 110,000
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………………… $795,000
Note: Because there were no beginning or ending work-in-process or finished
goods inventories, there is no difference here between cost of goods sold and
cost of goods manufactured, so no interim calculations for them are necessary.
$205,920,000
2-17
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-48
1. Sales Revenue = Number of Units Sold × Selling Price
= 280,000 units × $12
= $3,360,000
2.
Sales revenue………………………………………………………………
Cost of goods sold*………………………………………………………
Gross profit…………………………………………………………………
Less:
Selling expense…………………………………………………………
Administrative expense………………………………………………
Operating income…………………………………………………………
* Calculated in E2-47
Direct materials………………………………… $180,000
Direct labor……………………………………… 505,000
Manufacturing overhead……………………… 110,000
Cost of goods sold……………………… $795,000
E 2-49
1.
Sales &
Expenses
Sales revenue………………………………………… $3,360,000 100.0 a
Cost of goods sold*………………………………… 795,000 23.7 b
Gross profit…………………………………………… $2,565,000 76.3 c
Less:
Selling expense…………………………………… 437,000 13.0 d
Administrative expense………………………… 854,000 25.4 e
Operating income…………………………………… $1,274,000 37.9 f
* See solution to Exercise 2-48, Requirement 2.
a Sales revenue: $3,360,000/$3,360,000 = 1.00, or 100%
b Cost of goods sold: $795,000/$3,360,000 = 0.237, or 23.7%
c Gross profit: $2,565,000/$3,360,000 = 0.763, or 76.3%
d Selling expense: $437,000/$3,360,000 = 0.130, or 13.0%
e Administrative expense: $854,000/$3,360,000 = 0.254, or 25.4%
f Operating income: $1,274,000/$3,360,000 = 0.379, or 37.9%
$2,565,000
of Sales
Percent
$1,274,000
Jasper Company
Income Statement
For the Last Year
437,000
854,000
Jasper Company
Income Statement
For the Last Year
$3,360,000
795,000
2-18
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-49 (Concluded)
2. The income statement showing each account as a percentage of sales helps focus
managerial attention on those expenses that are relatively high. For Jasper, it
appears as though administrative expense is twice as large as selling expense.
Perhaps management could explain ways to reduce certain administrative
expenses, such as research and development or fees incurred for general counsel
(e.g., size of Jasper’s legal staff).
E 2-50
a (Direct Materials Used in Production) = Beginning Inventory Direct Materials +
Purchases – Ending Inventory Direct Materials
a = $10,000 + $45,000 – $15,000
= $40,000
To find b, one can rearrange the Cost of Goods Manufactured equation to solve for
Direct Labor Used in Production (i.e., the unknown, or b):
b (Direct Labor Used in Production) = Cost of Goods Manufactured – Direct
Materials Used in Production – Manufacturing Overhead Costs Used in
Production – Beginning WIP Inventory + Ending WIP Inventory
b = COGM – $40,000 (from a) – $80,000 – $17,000 + $14,000
Thus, in order to find b, we first need to calculate Cost of Goods Manufactured as
follows:
Cost of Goods Manufactured = Cost of Goods Sold – Beginning Finished Goods
Inventory + Ending Finished Goods Inventory
COGM = $169,000 – $8,000 + $7,000
= $168,000
Finally, inserting Cost of Goods Manufactured into the earlier equation:
b = $168,000 – $40,000 – $80,000 – $17,000 + $14,000
= $45,000
c (Direct Materials Beginning Inventory for Year 2) = Direct Materials Ending
Inventory for Year 1 = $15,000
d (Direct Materials Purchases for Year 2) = Direct Materials Used in Production –
Direct Materials Beginning Inventory + Direct Materials Ending Inventory
d = $50,000 – $15,000 + $17,000
= $52,000
e (Cost of Goods Sold for Year 2) = Beginning Finished Goods Inventory + Cost of
Goods Manufactured – Ending Finished Goods Inventory
e = $7,000 + COGM – $11,000; therefore, we must first calculate COGM to be able to
calculate COGS.
2-19
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
E 2-50 (Concluded)
So, COGM = Direct Materials Used in Production + Direct Labor Used in Production +
MOH Costs Used in Production + Beginning WIP Inventory – Ending WIP Inventory
COGM = $50,000 + $53,000 + $76,000 + $14,000 – $19,000
= $174,000
= $7,000 + $174,000 – $11,000
= $170,000
Therefore, e
2-20
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-51
1. Direct Direct Manufact.
Materials Labor Overhead
Hamburger meat…………………………… $4,500
Buns, lettuce, pickles, and onions……… 800
Frozen potato strips……………………… 1,250
Wrappers, bags, and condiment
packages………………………………… 600
Other ingredients………………………… 660
Part-time employees’ wages…………… $7,250
John Peterson’s salary…………………… $3,000
Utilities……………………………………… $1,500
Rent………………………………………… 1,800
Depreciation, cooking equipment
and fixtures……………………………… 600
Advertising………………………………… 500
Janitor’s wages…………………………… 520
Janitorial supplies………………………… 150
Accounting fees…………………………… 1,500
Taxes………………………………………… 4,250
Totals…………………………………… $7,810 $7,250 $4,570 $9,250
Explanation of Classification
Direct materials include all the food items that go into a burger bag, as well as the
condiment packages and the wrappers and bags themselves. These materials go
“out the door” in the final product. “Other ingredients” might include the oil to fry
the potato strips and grease the frying surface for the hamburgers and the salt for
the fries. They are direct materials but could also be classified as overhead because
of cost and convenience.
Direct labor consists of the part-time employees who cook food and fill orders.
Manufacturing overhead consists of all indirect costs associated with the production
process. These are the utilities, rent for the building, depreciation on the equipment
and register, and cost of janitorial fees and supplies.
Selling and administrative expense includes John Peterson’s salary, advertising,
accounting fees, and taxes.
Selling and
Cost Administrative
PROBLEMS
2-21
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-51 (Concluded)
2.
Sales ($3.50 × 10,000)………………………………………………… $35,000
Less cost of goods sold:
Direct materials…………………………………………………… $7,810
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 7,250
Manufacturing overhead………………………………………… 4,570 19,630
Gross margin…………………………………………………………… $15,370
Less: Selling and administrative expense………………………… 9,250
Net income………………………………………………………… $ 6,120
3. Elena’s simplifying assumptions were:
(1) all part-time employees are production workers,
(2) John Peterson’s salary is for selling and administrative functions,
(3) all building-related expense as well as depreciation on cooking equipment
and fixtures are for production, and
(4) all taxes are administrative expense.
These make it easy to classify 100% of each expense as product cost or selling
and administrative cost. The result is that she does not have to perform studies
of the time spent by each employee on producing versus selling burger bags. In
addition, it is likely that John Peterson pitches in to help fry burgers or assemble
burger bags when things get hectic. Of course, during those times, he is engaged
in production—not selling or administration. The cost of determining just exactly
how many minutes of each employee’s day is spent in production versus selling
is probably not worth it. (Remember, accountants charge by the number of hours
spent—the more time Elena spends separating costs into categories, the higher
her fees.)
For this small business, there is little problem with misclassifying Pop’s expenses.
Pop’s Drive-Thru Burger Heaven is not a publicly traded company, and its income
statements do not have to conform to GAAP. Outside use of the statements is
confined to government taxing authorities and a bank (if a loan or line of credit is
necessary). Elena’s accounting works well for those purposes. In addition, and
perhaps more importantly, the analysis of Pop’s results is not likely to change
dramatically based on these assumptions and therefore, the decisions that
Pop’s makes based on these statements would not be affected.
Pop’s Drive-Thru Burger Heaven
Income Statement
For the Month of December
2-22
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-52
1. Cost per Page for Black Ink = $25.50 = $0.03
850 pages
Total Owed to Harry by Mary = $0.03 × 500 pages = $15
Total Owed to Harry by Natalie = $0.03 × 1,000 pages = $30
2. Cost per Sheet for Paper = $2.50 = $0.005
500 sheets
Total Cost for Mary = 500 pages × ($0.03 + $0.005) = $17.50
Total Cost for Natalie = 1,000 pages × ($0.03 + $0.005) = $35
3. Cost per Page for Color Ink = $31 = $0.10
310 pages
Number of Black Ink Pages for Natalie = 1,000 × 0.80 = 800
Number of Color Ink Pages for Natalie = 1,000 × 0.20 = 200
Total Owed to Harry by Natalie = ($0.03 × 800 pages) + ($0.10 × 200) = $44
Total Cost to Natalie = [($0.03 + $0.005) × 800 pages] + [($0.10 + $0.005)
× 200 pages] = $49
P 2-53
1. Direct Materials = $40,000 + $64,000 – $19,800 = $84,200
2. Direct materials used…………………………………………………………… $ 84,200
Direct labor……………………………………………………………………… 43,500
Manufacturing overhead……………………………………………………… 108,750
Total manufacturing cost for July……………………………………… $236,450
Work in process, July 1……………………………………………………… 21,000
Work in process, July 31……………………………………………………… (32,500)
Cost of goods manufactured……………………………………………… $224,950
3. Cost of goods manufactured………………………………………………… $224,950
Finished goods inventory, July 1…………………………………………… 23,200
Finished good inventory, July 31…………………………………………… (22,100)
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………… $226,050
2-23
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-54
1. Direct materials……………………………… $18
Direct labor…………………………………… 12
Manufacturing overhead…………………… 16
Unit product cost………………………… $46
Total Product Cost = $46 × 200,000 units = $9,200,000
2.
Sales revenue ($60 × 200,000)…………………………………………… $12,000,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………… 9,200,000
Gross margin……………………………………………………………… $ 2,800,000
Less:
Commissions ($2 × 200,000)………………………………………… $ 400,000
Fixed selling expense………………………………………………… 100,000
Administrative expense……………………………………………… 300,000
Operating income………………………………………………………… $ 2,000,000
No, we do not need to prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactured
because there were no beginning or ending inventories of work in process.
As a result, total manufacturing cost is equal to the cost of goods manufactured.
3. The 10,000 tents in beginning finished goods inventory have a cost of $40, and
that is lower than the year’s unit product cost of $46. The FIFO assumption says
that beginning inventory is sold before current year production. Therefore, the
cost of goods sold will be lower than it would be if there were no beginning
inventory. This can be seen in the following statement of cost of goods sold.
Cost of goods manufactured ($46 × 200,000)………………………… $9,200,000
Beginning finished goods inventory ($40 × 10,000)………………… 400,000
Ending finished goods inventory ($46 × 10,000)…………………… (460,000)
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………… $9,140,000
Laworld Inc.
Income Statement
For Last Year
2-24
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-54 (Concluded)
Sales revenue ($60 × 200,000)…………………………………………… $12,000,000
Cost of goods sold………………………………………………………… 9,140,000
Gross margin………………………………………………………………… $ 2,860,000
Less:
Commissions ($2 × 200,000)………………………………………… $ 400,000
Fixed selling expense………………………………………………… 100,000
Administrative expense………………………………………………… 300,000
Operating income…………………………………………………………… $ 2,060,000
P 2-55
1. Direct Materials = $3,475 + $15,000 – $9,500 = $8,975
Direct materials used…………………………………… $ 8,975
Direct labor………………………………………………… 10,500
Manufacturing overhead:
Factory supplies……………………………………… $ 675
Factory insurance……………………………………… 350
Factory supervision…………………………………… 2,225
Material handling……………………………………… 3,750 7,000
Total manufacturing cost for May……………………… $ 26,475
Work in process, May 1………………………………… 12,500
Work in process, May 31………………………………… (14,250)
Cost of goods manufactured………………………… $ 24,725
2.
Cost of goods manufactured……………………………………………… $24,725
Finished goods inventory, May 1………………………………………… 6,685
Finished goods inventory, May 31……………………………………… (4,250)
Cost of goods sold……………………………………………………… $27,160
For the Month of May
Hayward Company
Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured
For the Month of May
Hayward Company
Revised Income Statement
For Last Year
Laworld Inc.
Statement of Cost of Goods Sold
2-25
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-56
1. c. These costs include direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing
overhead. The total of these three types of costs equals product cost.
2. a. If Linda returns to school, she will need to quit her job. The lost salary is the
opportunity cost of returning to school.
3. b. If Randy were engaged in manufacturing a product, his salary would be a
product cost. Instead, the product has been manufactured. It is in the finished
goods warehouse waiting to be sold. This is a period cost.
4. j. Jamie is working at company headquarters, and her salary is part of
administrative cost.
5. i. All factory costs other than direct materials and direct labor are, by definition,
overhead.
6. d. The design engineer is estimating the total number of labor hours required to
complete the manufacturing of a product. This total will be used to compute
direct labor cost.
7. h. This is direct materials cost.
8. g. The sum of direct materials and direct labor is, by definition, prime cost.
9. f. The cost of converting direct materials into finished product is the sum of
direct labor and manufacturing overhead. This is conversion cost.
10. e. The depreciation on the delivery trucks is part of selling cost, the cost of
selling and delivering product.
2-26
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-57
1. Before COGM can be calculated, Direct Materials Used in Production must first be
calculated as:
Direct Materials Used in Production = Beginning Direct Materials Inventory +
Direct Materials Purchases – Ending Direct Materials Inventory
= $20,000 + $40,000 – $10,000
= $50,000
Now,
COGM = Direct Materials Used in Production + Direct Labor Costs Used in
Production + Manufacturing Overhead Costs Used in Production + Beginning
WIP Inventory – Ending WIP Inventory
= $50,000 + $800,000 + $100,000 + $60,000 – $100,000
= $910,000
2. COGS = Beginning Finished Goods Inventory + COGM – Ending Finished Goods
Inventory
= $300,000 + $910,000 – $280,000
= $930,000
2-27
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-57 (Concluded)
3.
Sales ($2,100 × 700)…………………………………………………………… $1,470,000
Cost of goods sold…………………………………………………………… 930,000
Gross margin……………………………………………………………… $ 540,000
Less:
Selling expense…………………………………………..………………… 60,000
Administrative expense…………………………………………….…… 150,000
Operating income……………………………………………………… $ 330,000
4. The dominant cost is direct labor cost of $800,000. Direct labor is the dominant
cost because Berry’s core business is creating building plans, which is a laborintensive
process requiring expensive, well-trained architects. The materials
used to create building plans are relatively inexpensive.
P 2-58
1.
Direct materials*…………………………………………… $300,000
Direct labor…………………………………………………… 200,000
Manufacturing overhead:
Indirect labor…………………………………………… $40,000
Rent, factory building………………………………… 42,000
Depreciation, factory equipment…………………… 60,000
Utilities, factory………………………………………… 11,900 153,900
Total cost of product……………………………………… $653,900
Beginning work in process……………………………… 13,040
Ending work in process…………………………………… (14,940)
Cost of goods manufactured………………………… $652,000
* Beg. Inventory + Purchases – Ending Inventory = Direct Materials Used
Direct Materials Used = $46,800 + $320,000 – $66,800 = $300,000
Income Statement
Berry Company
Statement of Cost of Goods Manufactured
For Last Year
For Last Year
W. W. Phillips Company
2-28
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-58 (Concluded)
2. Average Cost of One Unit of Product = $652,000 = $163
4,000
3.
Sales ($400 × 3,800*)……………………………….…………… $1,520,000
Cost of goods sold**…………………………………………… 617,900
Gross margin…………………………………………………… $ 902,100
Less:
Selling expense:
Sales supervisor’s salary……………………………… $ 90,000
Commissions…………………………………………… 180,000 270,000
General administration expense………………………… 300,000
Operating income……………………………………… $ 332,100
* Units Sold = 4,000 + 500 – 700 = 3,800
** Cost of Goods Sold = $652,000 + $80,000 – $114,100 = $617,900
P 2-59
1. The Internet payment of $40 is an expense that would appear on the income
statement. This is because the Internet services are used up each month—Luisa
cannot “save” any unused Internet time for the next month.
2. The opportunity cost is the $100 that Luisa would have made if she had been able
to accept the movie role. It is an opportunity cost because it is the cost of the next
best alternative to dog walking.
3. The price is $250 per month per dog. (Note: The price is charged by Luisa to her
clients; it is not her cost.)
Total Revenue for a Month = $250 × 12 dogs = $3,000
W. W. Phillips Company
Income Statement
For Last Year
2-29
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-60
1. Direct materials:
Magazine (5,000 × $0.40)…………………………………… $2,000
Brochure (10,000 × $0.08)…………………………………… 800 $2,800
Direct labor:
Magazine (5,000/20 × $10)…………………………………… $2,500
Brochure (10,000/100 × $10)………………………………… 1,000 3,500
Manufacturing overhead:
Rent……………………………………………………………. $1,400
Depreciation ($40,000/20,000 × 350*)……………………… 700
Setups…………………………………………………………… 600
Insurance……………………………………………………… 140
Power…………………………………………………………… 350 3,190
Cost of goods manufactured…………………………………… $9,490
* Production is 20 units per printing hour for magazines and 100 units per printing hour for
brochures, yielding monthly machine hours of 350 [(5,000/20) + (10,000/100)]. This is also
monthly labor hours as machine labor only operates the presses.
2. Direct materials…………………………………………………… $2,800
Direct labor………………………………………………………… 3,500
Total prime costs……………………………………………… $6,300
Magazine:
Direct materials……………………………………………… $2,000
Direct labor…………………………………………………… 2,500
Total prime costs………………………………………… $4,500
Brochure:
Direct materials……………………………………………… $ 800
Direct labor…………………………………………………… 1,000
Total prime costs………………………………………… $1,800
3. Total monthly conversion cost:
Direct labor…………………………………………………… $3,500
Manufacturing overhead…………………………………… 3,190
Total………………………………………………………… $6,690
Magazine:
Direct labor…………………………………………………… $2,500
Manufacturing overhead:
Power ($1 × 250)…………………………………………… $ 250
Depreciation ($2 × 250)…………………………………… 500
Setups (2/3 × $600)………………………………………… 400
Rent and insurance ($4.40 × 250 DLH)*……………… 1,100 2,250
Total ……………………………………………………… $4,750
2-30
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-60 (Concluded)
Brochures:
Direct labor………………………………………………… $1,000
Manufacturing overhead:
Power ($1 × 100)……………………………………… $100
Depreciation ($2 × 100)……………………………… 200
Setups (1/3 × $600)…………………………………… 200
Rent and insurance ($4.40 × 100 DLH)*…………… 440 940
Total ………………………………………………… $1,940
* Rent and insurance cannot be traced to each product so the costs are assigned using direct
labor hours: $1,540/350 DLH = $4.40 per direct labor hour. The other overhead costs are traced
according to their usage. Depreciation and power are assigned by using machine hours (250
for magazines and 100 for brochures); $350/350 = $1.00 per machine hour for power and
$40,000/20,000 = $2.00 per machine hour for depreciation. Setups are assigned according to the
time required. Since magazines use twice as much time, they receive twice the cost: Letting X =
the proportion of setup time used for brochures, 2X + X = 1 implies a cost assignment ratio of
2/3 for magazines and 1/3 for brochures.
4. Sales [(5,000 × $1.80) + (10,000 × $0.45)]………………… $13,500
Less cost of goods sold……………………………………… 9,490
Gross margin…………………………………………………… $ 4,010
Less operating expenses:
Selling ……………………………………………………… $ 500 **
Administrative …………………………………………… 1,500 *** 2,000
Operating income……………………………………………… $ 2,010
** Distribution of goods is a selling expense.
*** A case could be made for assigning part of her salary to production. However, since she is
responsible for coordinating and managing all business functions, an administrative classification
is more convincing.
2-31
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
P 2-61
1. The costs of the tent sales are accounted for as selling expense. The tent
sales are designed to sell outdated or remanufactured products. They are
not the main reason that Kicker is in business. In fact, an important
objective is simply to increase awareness of the Kicker brand. As a result,
these related costs are selling expense.
2. Revenue…………………………………………………………………… $ 20,000
Cost of goods sold……………………………………………………… (7,000)
Tent sale expense……………………………………………………… (14,300)
Tent sale loss………………………………………………………… $ (1,300)
A couple of actions could be taken. First, it could look for a more
appropriate venue. The outer parking lot of a shopping center, or even a
large grocery store, would enable Kicker employees to easily load
purchased product into customer cars. Second, the disc jockey could be
dispensed with; instead, music could be played from CDs over the audio
system in the truck. Third, Kicker could spend a year or so raising brand
awareness in the Austin market before attempting another tent sale.
2-32
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
Case 2-62
1.
(DL) Machine operators Sales salaries
(DL) Other direct labor Advertising
(OH) Supervisory salaries
(DM) Pipe
(OH) Tires and fuel
(OH) Depreciation, equipment
(OH) Salaries of mechanics
2. Traceable costs using equipment hours:
Machine operators…………………………… $ 218,000
Other direct labor…………………………… 265,700
Pipe……………………………………………… 1,401,340
Tires and fuel………………………………… 418,600
Depreciation, equipment…………………… 198,000
Salaries of mechanics……………………… 50,000
Total………………………………………… $2,551,640
Machine operators, tires and fuel, and depreciation are all directly caused by
equipment usage, which is measured by equipment hours. One can also argue that
the amount of mechanic time required is also a function of equipment hours and so
the salaries of mechanics can be assigned using equipment hours. Pipe and other
direct labor can be assigned using equipment hours because their usage should
be highly correlated with equipment hours. That is, equipment hours increase
because there is more pipe being laid. As hours increase, so does the pipe usage.
A similar argument can be made for other direct labor. Actually, it is not necessary
to use equipment hours to assign pipe or other direct labor because these two
costs are directly traceable to jobs.
$2,551,640
18,200 hours
= $140.20 per hour
CASES
Production Selling
Traceable Cost per Equipment Hour =
Administrative
Utilities
Rent
CPA fees
Adm. salaries
20-33
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 2 Basic Managerial Accounting Concepts
Case 2-63
1. Leroy should politely and firmly decline the offer. The offer includes an implicit
request to use confidential information to help Jean win the bid. Use of such
information for personal advantage is wrong. Leroy has a professional and
personal obligation to his current employer. This obligation must take
precedence over the opportunity for personal financial gain.
Corporate codes of conduct emphasize honesty and integrity. Leroy has a
responsibility to act on behalf of his company, and clearly, disclosing
confidential information acquired in the course of his work to a competitor
would be prohibited. In addition, codes of corporate conduct also require
employees to avoid conflicts of interest and to refuse any gift, favor, or
hospitality that would influence employee actions inappropriately.
2. If Leroy agrees to review the bid, he will likely use his knowledge of his current
employer’s position to help Jean win the bid. In fact, agreement to help probably
would reflect a desire for the bonus and new job with the associated salary
increase. Helping would likely ensure that Jean would win the bid. Leroy was
concerned about the political fallout and subsequent investigation revealing
his involvement—especially if he sent up a red flag by switching to his friend’s
firm. An investigation may reveal the up-front bonus and increase the
suspicion about Leroy’s involvement. There is a real possibility that Leroy
could be implicated. Whether this would lead to any legal difficulties is another
issue. At the very least, some tarnishing of his professional reputation and
personal character is possible. Some risk to Leroy exists. The amount of risk,
though, should not be a factor in Leroy’s decision. What is right should be the
central issue, not the likelihood of getting caught.
2-34
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

1-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
INTRODUCTION TO MANAGERIAL
ACCOUNTING
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
1. Managerial accounting provides accounting information for internal users in a firm. Specifically, managerial
accounting identifies, collects, measures, classifies, and reports financial and nonfinancial information that is
useful to internal users in planning, controlling, and decision making. Managerial accounting also has no
mandatory rules, emphasizes the future, and is multidisciplinary.
2. The three broad objectives of managerial accounting are to provide information for planning, controlling, and
decision making.
3. The users of managerial accounting information are generally managers and other employees of a firm.
Managerial accounting information is typically not provided to outsiders but may be in selected cases. For
example, a bank may require budgeting information for the next few years before agreeing to grant a loan.
4. A managerial accounting system typically provides both financial and nonfinancial information. For example,
financial information on cost of production is tracked. Other information, such as the number of warranty
returns, may also be tracked by the management information system.
5. Controlling involves comparing the expected performance with the actual performance to see what
differences, if any, exist.
6. Planning occurs first. Planning requires setting objectives and identifying the means of achieving those
objectives. Then, the results of the plan are compared with the plan, which is called controlling. Clearly, it is
also feedback, in that any impediments or unexpected occurrences are noted. This feedback is then used to
develop the plan for the next period.
7. Managerial accounting is internally focused, does not follow mandatory rules, keeps track of both financial
and nonfinancial information, emphasizes the future, and relies on a broad range of disciplines. Financial
accounting, on the other hand, is externally focused, follows externally imposed rules (such as GAAP), has a
historical orientation, and provides information about the company as a whole.
8. Managerial accountants have had to broaden their focus beyond simple financial reporting to include the
gathering of information on all types of costs and of the value of the product or service to customers. These
broader costs are used in planning and decision making.
9. Customer value is the difference between what a customer receives and what the customer gives up when
buying a product or service. The focus on customer value forces management accounting to look at many
types of costs, not simply manufacturing cost. These may include the price of the good or service,
maintenance costs, search costs, learning costs, and disposal costs.
10. The value chain is the set of activities required to design, develop, produce, market, and deliver products
and services to customers. It is important because it helps the company to understand its role in serving
customers and to develop strategic competence.
11. Today’s managerial accountant must understand many functions of the business, from manufacturing to
marketing to distribution to customer service, in order to provide appropriate information for managing the
value chain. Increased international trade means the managerial accountant must be familiar with not only
business practices and laws in his or her own country but also in the countries with which the company
trades.
1
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Managerial Accounting
1-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
12. Enterprise risk management (ERM) refers to the formal process of identifying the factors or threats, both
internal and external to the organization that might prevent the organization from achieving its strategic
objectives. The managerial accountant plays an increasingly important role in ERM by providing financial and
nonfinancial measures of these threats and communicating them to high-level executives (e.g., chief risk
officer, chief financial officer, board of directors) in the organization who manage these factors.
13. Line positions are those that have direct responsibility for the basic objectives of an organization. These
typically include producing and selling a product. Staff positions are supportive in nature (e.g., human
resources, maintenance) and have only indirect responsibility for an organization’s basic objectives.
14. Yes, the controller should be a member of top management. This is because the controller, as the chief
accountant for the firm, has a wealth of information needed by top management in determining the strategic
direction of the firm.
15. Ethical behavior involves choosing actions that are right, proper, and just. Yes, it is possible to teach aspects
of ethical behavior in a managerial accounting classroom. Students need to see examples of right and wrong
behavior in business. These examples help them to recognize ethical dilemmas later on the job.
16. One major theme or executive pressure common to many of the recent accounting scandals is a focus on the
short term, rather than the long term. For example, WorldCom wrongly decided to increase current period net
income by inappropriately decreasing current period expenses (by recording more of the expenditures as an
asset that would be expensed in small amounts each period rather than all at once in the current period).
Often, the high-level executives that perpetrate such financial fraud are rewarded by incentives that
overweight current period net income performance relative to long-term net income performance. Another
major theme common to many of the accounting and banking frauds is a lack of sufficient transparency, or
clarity, in the types and timing of the information that is reported to parties outside of the organization. Some
business experts also would argue that a third common theme underlying many of these scandals was the
lack of sufficient oversight (i.e., watchdog mentality) by the perpetrating organization’s auditors, board of
directors, or both.
17. The three forms of certification discussed are the Certified Management Accountant, the Certified Public
Accountant, and the Certified Internal Auditor. While all three are appropriate to the accountant within the
company, only the CMA exam is interdisciplinary and covers the broad range of subjects faced by the
managerial accountant.
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Managerial Accounting
1-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
1-1. c
1-2. b
1-3. a
1-4. b
1-5. e
1-6. e
1-7. d
1-8. b
1-9. e
1-10. d
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Managerial Accounting
1-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
EXERCISES
E 1-11
a. Decision making
b. Controlling
c. Planning
d. Decision making
e. Planning
f. Decision making
E 1-12
a. Managerial accounting oriented
b. Financial accounting oriented
c. Managerial accounting oriented
d. Financial accounting oriented
e. Managerial accounting oriented
E 1-13
1. The total product is the product and its features (processing speed, disk drives,
software packages, and so on), the service, the operating and maintenance
requirements, and the delivery speed.
2. One company is emphasizing low costs, and the other is attempting to differentiate
its PC by offering faster delivery and higher-quality service.
3. The Confiar’s service component and its delivery time appear to be better than
Drantex’s. Thus, the realization of these features appears to outweigh the additional
sacrifice (the additional operating and maintenance cost) associated with the
Confiar PC. The implications for management accounting are straightforward. The
management accounting information system should collect and report information
about customer realization and sacrifice. Much of this information is external to the
firm but clearly needed by management.
4. Better quality and shorter delivery time increase the value of what the customer
receives, while lowering the price decreases the amount paid. In total, customer
value has increased, and presumably, this should make the Drantex PC much more
competitive. This example illustrates how quality, time, and costs are essential
competitive weapons. It also illustrates how critical it is for the management
accounting system to collect and report data concerning these three dimensions.
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Managerial Accounting
1-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
E 1-14
Joan Dennison is staff. She is in a support role—she prepares reports and helps explain
and interpret them. Her role is to help the line managers more effectively carry out their
responsibilities.
Steven Swasey is a line manager. He has direct responsibility for producing a garden
hose. Clearly, one of the basic objectives for the existence of a manufacturing firm is to
make a product. Thus, Steven has direct responsibility for a basic objective and holds a
line position.
E 1-15
No, it is not ethical for Steve to demand a kickback from Dave. Dave should not agree
to this unethical proposal. This brief situation actually happened to Dave, a friend of
one of the authors. The author advised Dave not to accept the deal. Dave then checked
with his lawyer who bluntly told him the deal was illegal. Dave did not accept. In
addition to rejecting Steve’s unethical offer, Dave might consider reporting the
unethical offer to relevant key stakeholders, such as Steve’s superiors in the
university’s Athletic Department, university’s Office of the Provost, or president.
Hopefully, university administrators would be interested in learning of one (or more)
of its employees damaging the integrity of its bidding process with key business
partners such as Dave’s printing shop. If Dave were a management accountant, he
should consider the IMA’s Statement of Ethical Professional Practice and what it says
about avoiding and reporting such unethical behavior (e.g., see the first standard under
Integrity and the second under Credibility).
E 1-16
A manager has a responsibility to the company as well as society. If the manager
lays off the employees, he or she ignores both of these responsibilities. In effect, the
manager would be pursuing self-interest at the expense of the company and the
salespeople. While pursuit of self-interest is not necessarily unethical, it can be if it
harms others. In this case, the manager’s action could result in lower profits for the
company because sales may decrease and unnecessary training costs will be incurred
when the positions are refilled the following year. Similarly, it is unjust to penalize
productive employees simply to earn a bonus. The right choice is to retain the three
salespeople. In ethical terms, the manager is not behaving with integrity.
The reward system, in part, encouraged this behavior. Apparently, the manager is paid a
bonus if profits exceed 10% of planned profits. By basing rewards on a measure such
as short-run profits, the company has given the manager an incentive to manipulate
earnings in the short run. One way of manipulating annual earnings is to reduce or
defer discretionary expenditures.
This type of behavior can be discouraged by proper matching of expenses with
revenues and by expanding the performance measures to include long-run factors
like market share, productivity, and personnel development. The accounting system
CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Managerial Accounting
1-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
can also be used to track trends (e.g., training costs over time). Moreover, managers
can be required to provide extensive justification for significant changes in
discretionary expenses.
E 1-17
1. By the time most students graduate from high school, they have not had much
exposure to business. Therefore, they do not have full knowledge of acceptable
behavior for the business environment. Students may not know that certain
practices are unethical because they may not be familiar with the behavioral norms
associated with these practices. Once students begin to learn business practices,
they begin to see what ethical dilemmas can arise in a business context. Then they
are able to apply the moral training they have had to deal with the situations.
Furthermore, evidence exists that ethical reasoning can be changed for the better.
Thus, instruction in ethics can be a vital part of a student’s education.
2. Sacrificing self-interest is a choice that each person must make. Others may be
influenced by those individuals who behave ethically. Individuals committed to
ethical behavior produce societies committed to ethical behavior.
3. While this sounds noble, many would disagree that managers are first seeking to
serve others and accept personal financial rewards as a by-product of a good job.
Pursuit of self-interest and personal financial well-being is not necessarily unethical.
It is only when this pursuit is done at the expense of the collective good that the
behavior becomes questionable.
4. It is often true that unethical firms and individuals suffer financially. In the long run,
some evidence suggests that ethical behavior does pay. It is doubtful, however,
that every unethical firm or individual is wiped out financially. Too many notable
exceptions to this statement exist (e.g., the selling of drugs by organized crime).
E 1-18
The employees should not follow the suggestion of their boss to purchase more
shares in anticipation of a buyout. This is insider trading and is illegal. Insider trading
is prohibited by many corporate codes of ethics. Even when it is not explicitly
prohibited by the corporate code of ethics, it is still wrong and illegal.
E 1-19
Answers will vary.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

Happiness exam

EXAM #4                                                     NAME_______________________________

BUS500C                                                    GRADES _____________________________

                                   

Warning: While it is an open book, please work on the exam by yourself and do not communicate with anyone about the exam.

 

Instruction: The final submission can either be in Excel or in this MS Word file or with both; your answers should be based analyzing the MS Excel file Happiness_2011.xls on the Happiness Survey under Exam 4; MS Excel file is organized with multiple datasheet for you in the Happiness_2011.xls file. In this exam, you can treat ordinal variables as interval variables.

 

 

  1. Please Perform ANOVA One-Factor Analysis by doing the following (Hint: Chapter 12, ANOVA):
  2. Organize the data and show in MS Excel (5 points);
  3. Write down one question that you could answers using ANOVA One Factor analysis with the Happiness_2011.xls dataset and state its null and alternate hypotheses (5 points);
  4. Perform one ANOVA One-Factor analysis using two reasonable variables from the Happiness_2011.xls dataset (one quantitative variable and one qualitative group variable) and show the analysis results for the question (10 points);
  5. Indicate whether you reject or accept the null hypothesis (5 points);
  6. Interpret your findings from the analysis (5 points).

Note:

  1. in Excel, you may use Sort function to select the data under different categories from the dataset, and then use the organized dataset to perform the analysis.
  2. For one-way/factor ANOVA test, please watch the video under Chapter 12: One way/factor ANOVA: www.youtube.com/watch?v=leHOBf_-9kM)

 

 

  1. Please Perform one Chi-square Test by doing the following (Hint: Chapter 15/17, Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square):
  2. Organize the data and show in MS Excel (5 points);
  3. Write down one potential question that you could answers using Chi-square test with the Happiness_2011.xls dataset and state its null and alternate hypotheses (5 points);
  4. Perform one Nonparametric Methods: Chi-Square Test using any two reasonable variables from the Happiness_2011.xls dataset (two qualitative variables) and show the analysis results for the question (10 points);
  5. Indicate whether you reject or accept the null hypothesis (5 points);
  6. Interpret your findings from the analysis (5 points).

Note:

  1. in Excel, you may use PivotTable function to build your contingency table from the dataset, and then use the table to perform the analysis. See Video under Chapter 1: How to build a PivotTable in Excel (optional): http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=7zHLnUCtfUk
  2. For Chi-square test, please watch the video under Chapter 15/17:: Chi-Square Test  (Test of Contingency Table or Test for Independence) In Excel using data analysis: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=WDLMhwuNATY

 

  1. Please Perform regression analysis by doing the following (Hint: Chapter 13 on simple regression and 14 on multiple regression):
  2. Organize the data and show in MS Excel (5 points);
  3. Write down potential questions that you could answer using regression analysis for the Happiness_2011.xls dataset (5 points);
  4. Perform one simple regression using any two reasonable variables from the Happiness_2011.xls file (two quantitative variables) and show the analysis results (10 points);
  5. Interpret the findings from the simple regression analysis (5 points);
  6. Add one or more quantitative variable (including dummy variable that have values of 0 and 1) to the analysis in #b, perform one multiple regression analysis (10 points)
  7. Interpret your findings from the multiple regression analysis (5 points).

 

Note:

  1. in Excel, you may copy the columns of the variables you want to analyze from the Happiness_2011 dataset and paste them next to each other in a new datasheet.
  2. For simple regression analysis, please watch the video under Chapter 13: simple regression basics (Excel): http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=8JOJ_7R_OWY and its interpretation explanation  of simple regression: http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=c5blVUkkjTM

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

Steinbeck’s Grapes of Wrath

Throughout Steinbeck’s
Grapes of Wrath
, the theme of transition is repeated. We have found many
examples of transitions of characters, generations, society, and in other areas. For this paper, you must
examine this idea. You may choose one transition to explore thoroughly. You may combine more than
one transition or a combination of them. Do not just list and explain them. Find a thesis that allows you
to write a four to five page paper showing what the transition is, who or what is involved, what the
catalyst is for the change, the consequences, gains, outcomes, so forth. You do not have to include all of
the above. This serves as a guide to get you started.
You are encouraged to find a transition that we did not discuss; however, be sure to be thorough on
what it is and why it is significant.
The paper is to be four to five pages, double-spaced, with one-inch margins and in size 12 font in MLA
format. You must include quotes. It will be graded according to the standards used for the previous
papers.
No forbidden words.
BE WARNED, I DO PLAGARISM CHECKS ON THESE PAPERS SO BE VERY CAREFUL
THAT THE WORK IS ALL YOUR OWN.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

Guidelines for Film Essay

Guidelines for Film Essay

 

Pick a film from the list below. For the film you choose, write a clear and concise 1000-word essay addressing the following points: Briefly summarize the most important elements of the plot of the film. How does the film view those aspects of politics that we have discussed in class? Relate the film to specific readings that we have done in class. In your analysis, be sure to make use of specific scenes and specific quotes from the film. You should discuss in some detail, at a minimum, three quotes the film in writing your paper. Be sure to include the word count at the end of the essay. The body of your essay should be 1000 words (not counting bibliography). If you write less than 1000 words, your essay may get a 0.

 

One-inch margins, 12-pt font.

 

    Lions for Lambs (R): Three parallel storylines unfold to share a common bond and a powerful message. One story tells the journey of two soldiers in Afghanistan, another takes place in the office of a professor at a California University, and the third is a dialogue between a reporter and a Congressman. United Artists, 2007.

  • All the President’s Men (PG): The story of the infamous media driven investigation of the break-in at the Watergate Hotel, which would eventually lead to the resignation of an American President. Warner Brothers, 1976.
  • Wag the Dog (R): Media spin doctors demonstrate how influential they have become in this satirical look at modern politics. New Line Cinema, 1997.
  • The Insider (R): A research chemist turns whistle blower to expose a corporate giant. This true story shows the price one man paid for telling the truth. Blue Lion Entertainment, 1999.
  • The Distinguished Gentleman (R): A con man uses the likeness of his name to get elected to the US Congress. Once in public office, he must decide between his own interests and those of his constituents. Hollywood Pictures, 1992.
  • Bulworth (R): A Congressman has a nervous breakdown and decides to tell the public the truth about American politics by adopting hip-hop culture and spreading his message through rhyming/rap. Twentieth Century Fox, 1998.
  • Primary Colors (R): The story of Jack Stanton, a governor running for President and deal with a sex scandal along the way. Universal, 1998.
  • Mr. Smith Goes to Washington (NR): Classic Jimmy Stewart movie shows a naive businessman who takes a courageous stand as a Senator. Columbia, 1939.

 

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

TACTICAL DECISION MAKING AND RELEVANT ANALYSIS

1. Tactical decisions are short run in nature; they involve choosing among alternatives with an
immediate or limited end in view. Strategic decisions involve selecting strategies that yield a
long-term competitive advantage.
2. A manager can identify alternatives by using his or her own knowledge and experience and by
obtaining input from others who are familiar with the problem.
3. Past costs can be used to help predict future costs.
4. Depreciation is an allocation of a sunk cost. This cost is a past cost and will never differ across
alternatives.
5. The salary of the supervisor of an assembly line with excess capacity is an example of an
irrelevant future cost for an accept-or-reject decision.
6. Yes. Suppose, for example, that sufficient materials are on hand for producing a part for 2 years.
After 2 years, the part will be replaced by a newly engineered part. If there is no alternative use
for the materials, then the cost of the materials is a sunk cost and not relevant in a make-or-buy
decision.
7. If a firm is operating below capacity, then a price that is above variable costs will increase profits.
8. A segment is any subunit of sufficient importance to warrant production of performance reports.
9. Contribution margin is the amount available to cover fixed expenses and provide for profit.
Segment margin is the amount available to cover common fixed expenses and provide for
profit. Contribution margin is the difference between revenues and variable expenses.
Segment margin is contribution margin less direct fixed expenses.
10. A complementary effect is the loss of revenue on a secondary product when the primary product
is dropped. Thus, complementary effects may make it more expensive to drop a product.
11. No. Joint costs are irrelevant in a sell or process further decision. They occur regardless of
whether the product is sold at the split-off point or processed further.
12. Yes. The incremental revenue is $1,400, and the incremental cost is only $1,000, creating a
net benefit of $400.
13. No. If a scarce resource is used in producing the two products, then the product providing the
greatest contribution per unit of scarce resource should be selected. For more than one scarce
resource, linear programming may be used to select the optimal mix.
8
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
TACTICAL DECISION MAKING
AND RELEVANT ANALYSIS
8-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
8-1. e
8-2. b
8-3. e
8-4. c
8-5. b
8-6. e
8-7. e
8-8. c
8-9. b
8-10. d
8-11. c
8-12. c
8-13. c
8-14. a
8-15. d
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
8-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-16
1. There are two alternatives: make the ingredient in-house or purchase it externally.
2. Relevant costs of making the ingredient in-house include direct materials, direct labor,
and variable overhead (both manufacturing and marketing). Relevant costs of
purchasing the ingredient externally include the purchase price.
3.
Make Buy
Direct materials…………………………… $25,000 — $ 25,000
Direct labor………………………………… 15,000 — 15,000
Variable manufacturing overhead……… 7,500 — 7,500
Variable marketing overhead…………… 10,000 — 10,000
Purchase cost……………………………… — $60,000 (60,000)
Total relevant cost………………………… $57,500 $60,000 $ (2,500)
It is cheaper to make the ingredient in-house. This alternative is cheaper by $2,500.
4.
Make Buy
Direct materials…………………………… $25,000 — $ 25,000
Direct labor………………………………… 15,000 — 15,000
Variable manufacturing overhead……… 7,500 — 7,500
Variable marketing overhead…………… 10,000 — 10,000
Avoidable fixed plant overhead………… 6,000 — 6,000
Purchase cost……………………………… — $60,000 (60,000)
Total relevant cost………………………… $63,500 $60,000 $ 3,500
Now it is cheaper to purchase the ingredient. This alternative is cheaper by $3,500.
* $30,000 × 0.20 = $6,000
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET A
Cost to Make
Alternatives Differential
Cost to Make
Alternatives Differential
*
8-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-17
1. Relevant costs and benefits of accepting the special order include the sales price of
$5, direct materials, direct labor, and variable overhead. No relevant costs or
benefits are attached to rejecting the order.
2. If the problem is analyzed on a unit basis:
Accept Reject
Price……………………………………… $ 5.00 — $ 5.00
Direct materials………………………… (1.75) — (1.75)
Direct labor……………………………… (2.50) — (2.50)
Variable overhead…………………… (1.50) — (1.50)
Decrease in operating income……… $(0.75) — $(0.75)
Operating income will decrease by $7,500 [($0.75) × 10,000 units] if the special order
is accepted; therefore, the special order should be rejected.
Differential
Benefit to
Accept
8-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-18
Poinsettias Fruit Trees Total
Sales……………………………………… $970,000 $3,100,000 $4,070,000
Less variable expenses:
Variable cost of goods sold……… 460,000 1,630,000 2,090,000
Variable selling expense…………… 38,800 124,000 162,800
Contribution margin…………………… $471,200 $1,346,000 $1,817,200
Less direct fixed expenses:
Direct fixed overhead……………… 160,000 200,000 360,000
Direct selling and administrative… 146,000 87,000 233,000
Segment margin………………………… $165,200 $1,059,000 $1,224,200
Less common fixed expenses:
Common fixed overhead………………………………………………… 800,000
Common selling and administrative…………………………………… 450,000
Operating income (loss)…………………………………………………… $ (25,800)
For the Coming Year
Gorman Nurseries Inc.
Segmented Income Statement
8-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-19
1. The two alternatives are to keep the parquet flooring line or to drop it.
2. The relevant benefits and costs of keeping the parquet flooring line include sales
of $300,000, variable costs of $250,000, machine rent cost of $40,000*, and
supervision cost of $20,000.
None of the relevant benefits and costs of keeping the parquet flooring line would
occur under the drop alternative.
* The $40,000 of relevant machine rent cost is computed as 0.80 of the total $50,000 machine rent cost.
3.
Keep Drop
Sales…………………………………… $300,000 — $300,000
Less: Variable expenses…………… 250,000 — 250,000
Contribution margin………………… $ 50,000 — $ 50,000
Less: Machine rent*………………… (40,000) — (40,000)
Supervision…………………… (20,000) — (20,000)
Total relevant benefit (loss)………… $ (10,000) — $ (10,000)
The differential amount to keep the line is ($10,000), thus, in favor of dropping the
parquet flooring.
* $50,000 × 0.80 = $40,000
Differential
Amount to
Accept
8-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-20
1. Previous contribution margin of the strip line was $175,000. A 10% decrease in
sales implies a 10% percent decrease in total variable costs, so the contribution
margin decreases by 10%.
New Contribution Margin for Strip = $175,000 – 0.10($175,000) = $157,500.
The reasoning is the same for the plank line, but the decrease is 5%.
New Contribution Margin for Plank = $80,000 – 0.05($80,000) = $76,000.
Therefore, if the parquet floor product line were dropped, the resulting total
contribution margin for Hickory would equal $233,500 ($157,500 + $76,000).
2.
Keep Drop
Contribution margin…………… $305,000 $233,500 $ 71,500
Less: Machine rent……………… (75,000) (35,000) (40,000)
Supervision……………… (45,000) (25,000) (20,000)
Total………………………………… $185,000 $173,500 $ 11,500
* $50,000 × 0.20 = $10,000; $10,000 (remaining parque) + $15,000 (strip) + $10,000 (plank) = $35,000
Notice that the contribution margin for the drop alternative equals the new
contribution margins of the strip and plank lines ($157,500 + $76,000). Also, machine
rent and supervision remain relevant across these alternatives.
As shown in BE 8-19, the decision to drop the parquet flooring line makes Hickory
better off by $10,000 (avoided relevant costs were greater than the lost contribution
margin) when only the parquet line is considered. However, as shown in this
exercise (BE 8-20), dropping parquet would have an $11,500 net detrimental effect
on the other two lines in that Hickory would lose contribution margin of $71,500
but only avoid relevant costs of $60,000. Therefore, Hickory is better off by
$11,500 if it KEEPS the parquet line.
BE 8-21
1. Revenue from Logs = (8,000 × $495) = $3,960,000
2. Revenue from Further Processing = $0.75 × (8,000 × 800) = $4,800,000
Further Processing Cost = $0.15 × (8,000 × 800) = $960,000
Income from Further Processing = $4,800,000 – $960,000 = $3,840,000
3. Jack’s should sell the logs without further processing because the company
will make $3,960,000 versus the $3,840,000 it would make by processing the
logs further for use in regular construction framing.
Differential
Amount to Keep
*
8-7
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-22
1. Swoop Rufus
Contribution margin per unit……………………………… $ 5.00 $15.00
÷ Required machine time per unit*……………………… 0.10 0.33
Contribution margin per hour of machine time………… $50.00 $45.00
2. Since the Swoop sweatshirt yields $50 of contribution margin per hour of machine
time (which is higher than the $45 contribution margin per hour of machine time
for Rufus), all machine time (i.e., 7,000 hours) should be devoted to the production
of Swoop sweatshirts.
The optimal mix is Swoop = 70,000 units and Rufus = 0 units.
3. Total Contribution Margin of Optimal Mix = 70,000 units Swoop × $5
= $350,000
Note: Brief Exercise 8-22 (as well as Example 8.7) clearly illustrates
a fundamentally important point involving relevant decision making with a
constrained resource. The point is that when making this relevant decision, one
should choose the option with the highest contribution margin per unit of the
constrained resource —even if that option does not have the highest contribution
margin per unit. For instance, in this exercise, Rufus’s contribution margin is three
times greater than Swoop’s contribution margin ($15 > $5). However, because
each Rufus sweatshirt requires more than three times as much machine time to
produce than each Swoop sweatshirt (0.33 machine hour per Rufus sweatshirt
> 0.10 machine hour per Swoop sweatshirt), Swoop has a higher contribution
margin per machine hour than does Rufus ($50 > $45).
60 minutes *
Units of Swoop = = 70,000 units
0.10 = 0.33 =
0.10 hour per Swoop sweatshirt
7,000 total hours
6 minutes per Swoop unit
60 minutes
20 minutes per Rufus unit
8-8
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-23
1. Swoop Rufus
Contribution margin per unit………………………………… $ 5.00 $15.00
÷ Required machine time per unit*…………………………… 0.10 0.33
Contribution margin per hour of machine time…………… $50.00 $45.00
2. Since Swoop yields $50 of contribution margin per hour of machine time,
the first priority is to produce all of the Swoop sweatshirts that the market
will take (i.e., demands). Machine time required for maximum amount of
Swoop = 40,000 maximum units × 0.10 hour of machine time required per
Swoop sweatshirt = 4,000 hours needed to manufacture 40,000 Swoop
sweatshirts.
Remaining Machine Time
for Rufus Sweatshirts
= 3,000 hours
Units of Rufus to Be Produced
in Remaining 3,000 Hours
Now the optimal mix is 40,000 units of Swoop sweatshirts and 9,091 units of
Rufus sweatshirts. This mix will precisely exhaust the machine time available.
* Differences due to rounding.
3. Total Contribution Margin of Optimal Mix = (40,000 units Swoop × $5) +
(9,091 units Rufus × $15)
= $336,365
BE 8-24
Price = Cost + (Markup Percentage × Cost)
= $170,000 + 0.15($170,000)
= $170,000 + $25,500
=
BE 8-25
1. Desired Profit = 0.25 × Target Price
= 0.25 × $380
= $95
2. Target Cost = Target Price – Desired Profit
= $380 – $95
= $285
* 0.10 = 0.33
6 minutes per Swoop unit
60 minutes
20 minutes per Rufus unit
= 7,000 hours – 4,000 hours
$195,500
0.33 hours per unit
3,000 hours
=
60 minutes
= = 9,091 units*
8-9
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-26
1. There are two alternatives: make Two AM in-house or purchase it externally.
2. Relevant costs of making Two AM in-house include direct materials, direct labor, and
variable overhead (both manufacturing and marketing). Relevant costs of purchasing
Two AM externally include the purchase price.
3.
Make Buy
Direct materials……………………………… $2,000,000 — $ 2,000,000
Direct labor…………………………………… 350,000 — 350,000
Variable manufacturing overhead………… 150,000 — 150,000
Variable marketing overhead……………… 250,000 — 250,000
Purchase cost………………………………… — $2,500,000 (2,500,000)
Total relevant cost…………………………… $2,750,000 $2,500,000 $ 250,000
It is cheaper to buy Two AM in-house. This alternative is cheaper by $250,000.
4.
Make Buy
Direct materials……………………………… $2,000,000 — $ 2,000,000
Direct labor…………………………………… 350,000 — 350,000
Variable manufacturing overhead………… 150,000 — 150,000
Variable marketing overhead……………… 250,000 — 250,000
Intellectual property theft
management cost…………………………… — 350,000 (350,000)
Purchase cost………………………………… — $2,500,000 (2,500,000)
Total relevant cost…………………………… $2,750,000 $2,850,000 $ (100,000)
Now it is cheaper to make Two AM in-house. This alternative is cheaper by $100,000.
Cost to Make
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET B
Alternatives Differential
Cost to Make
Alternatives Differential
8-10
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-27
1. Relevant costs and benefits of accepting the special order include the sales price of
$18,000, direct materials, direct labor, and variable overhead. No relevant costs or
benefits are attached to rejecting the order.
2. If the problem is analyzed on a unit basis:
Accept Reject
Price………………………………… $ 18,000.00 — $ 18,000.00
Direct materials…………………… (10,000.00) — (10,000.00)
Direct labor………………………… (2,000.00) — (2,000.00)
Variable overhead………………… (4,000.00) — (4,000.00)
Increase in operating income…… $ 2,000.00 — $ 2,000.00
Operating income will increase by $10,000,000 [($2,000) × 5,000 units], if the special
order is accepted; therefore, the special order should be accepted.
Differential
Benefit to
Accept
8-11
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-28
Bladers Ballers Total
Sales……………………………………… $80,000,000 $180,000,000 $260,000,000
Less variable expenses:
Variable cost of goods sold……… 10,000,000 30,000,000 40,000,000
Variable selling expense…………… 4,000,000 9,000,000 13,000,000
Contribution margin…………………… $66,000,000 $141,000,000 $207,000,000
Less direct fixed expenses:
Direct fixed overhead……………… 20,000,000 100,000,000 120,000,000
Direct selling and administrative… 4,000,000 10,000,000 14,000,000
Segment margin………………………… $42,000,000 $ 31,000,000 $ 73,000,000
Less common fixed expenses:
Common fixed overhead……………………………………………………… 18,000,000
Common selling and administrative………………………………………… 8,000,000
Operating income (loss)………………………………………………………… $ 47,000,000
Kraft Bowlen
Segmented Income Statement
For the Coming Year
8-12
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-29
1. The two alternatives are to keep the Boat Maintenance line or to drop it.
2. The relevant benefits and costs of keeping the Boat Maintenance line include sales
of $5,000,000, variable costs of $4,900,000, garage/warehouse cost of $210,000*, and
supervision cost of $75,000**.
None of the relevant benefits and costs of keeping the Boat Maintenance line would
occur under the drop alternative.
* The $210,000 of relevant garage/warehouse cost is computed as 0.60 of the total $350,000
garage/warehouse cost.
** The $75,000 of relevant supervision salaries is computed as 0.50 of the total $150,000 supervision
cost.
3.
Keep Drop
Sales…………………………………… $5,000,000 — $5,000,000
Less: Variable expenses…………… 4,900,000 — 4,900,000
Contribution margin………………… $ 100,000 — $ 100,000
Less: Garage/warehouse rent*…… (210,000) — (210,000)
Supervision**………………… (75,000) — (75,000)
Total relevant benefit (loss)………… $ (185,000) — $ (185,000)
The differential amount to keep the line is ($185,000), thus, in favor of dropping the
Boat Maintenance line.
* $350,000 × 0.60 = $210,000
** $150,000 × 0.50 = $75,000
Differential
Amount to
Accept
8-13
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-30
1. Previous contribution margin of the Winter Storage line was $2,000,000. A 20% decrease
in sales implies a 20% percent decrease in total variable costs, so the contribution
margin decreases by 20%.
New Contribution Margin for Winter Storage = $2,000,000 – 0.20($2,000,000) = $1,600,000.
The reasoning is the same for the Boat Fuel & Concessions line, but the decrease is
10%.
New Contribution Margin for Boat Fuel & Concessions =
$800,000 – 0.10($800,000) = $720,000.
Therefore, if the Boat Maintenance line were dropped, the resulting total
contribution margin for Mullett Marina would equal $2,320,000 ($1,600,000 + $720,000).
2.
Keep Drop
Contribution margin………………… $ 2,900,000 $2,320,000 $ 580,000
Less: Garage/warehouse rent……… (1,105,000) (895,000) (210,000)
Supervision…………………… (270,000) (195,000) (75,000)
Total relevant benefit (loss)………… $ 1,525,000 $1,230,000 $ 295,000
* $350,000 × 0.40 = $140,000 (remaining Boat Maintenance) + $700,000 (Winter Storage) +
$55,000 (Fuel & Con) = $895,000
** $150,000 × 0.50 = $75,000 (remaining Boat Maintenance + $50,000 (Winter Storage) +
$70,000 (Fuel & Con) = $195,000
Notice that the contribution margin for the drop alternative equals the new
contribution margins of the Winter Storage and Boat Fuel & Concessions lines
($1,600,000 + $720,000). Also, garage rent and supervision remain relevant across
these alternatives.
As shown in BE 8-29, the decision to drop the Boat Maintenance line makes Mullett
better off by $185,000 (avoided relevant costs were greater than the lost contribution
margin) when only the Boat Maintenance line is considered. However, as shown in this
exercise (BE 8-30), dropping Boat Maintenance would have a $295,000 net detrimental
effect on the other two lines in that Mullett would lose contribution margin of $580,000
but only avoid relevant costs of $285,000. Therefore, Mullett is better off by $295,000
if it KEEPS the Boat Maintenance line.
BE 8-31
1. Revenue (or contribution to income) from selling consumable milk =
(1,000,000 × $3) = $3,000,000
2. Revenue from Further Processing = $6.00 × (1,000,000 × 0.50) = $3,000,000
Further Processing Cost = $1.50 × (1,000,000 × 0.50) = $750,000
Income from Further Processing = $3,000,000 – $750,000 = $2,250,000
3. Bart’s should NOT further process the consumable milk into butter because the
company would make only $2,250,000 versus the $3,000,000 it would make by selling
the milk at the split-off point (i.e., not processing further).
Differential
Amount to Keep
*
**
8-14
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-32
1. Full Body
Contribution margin per unit……………………………… $198.00 $ 90.00
÷ Required masseuse time per massage*……………… 1.50 0.50
Contribution margin per hour of masseuse time……… $132.00 $180.00
2. Since the Trouble Spots massage yields $180 of contribution margin per
hour of masseuse time (which is higher than the $132 contribution margin
per hour of masseuse time for Full Body), all masseuse time (i.e., 6,000 hours)
should be devoted to the provision of Trouble Spots massages.
= 12,000 units
The optimal mix is Trouble Spots = 12,000 massages and Full Body =
0 massages
3. Total Contribution Margin
of Optimal Mix
= $2,376,000
= 12,000 units Trouble Spots × $198
6,000 total masseuse hours
0.50 hour per Trouble Spots massage
Trouble Spots
30 minutes per Trouble Spots unit
60 minutes
* 0.50 =
Units of Trouble Spots
60 minutes
1.50 =
90 minutes per Full Body unit
=
8-15
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
BE 8-33
1. Full Body
Contribution margin per massage $198.00 $ 90.00
÷ Required masseuse time per massage*……………………… 1.50 0.50
Contribution margin per hour of masseuse time…………… $132.00 $180.00
2. Since Trouble Spots yields $180 of contribution margin per hour of masseuse time,
the first priority is to offer all of the Trouble Spots massages that the market will
take (i.e., demands). Masseuse time required for maximum amount of Trouble Spots =
8,000 maximum units × 0.50 hours of masseuse time required per Trouble Spots =
4,000 hours needed to provide 8,000 Trouble Spots massages.
Remaining Masseuse Time
for Full Body Massages
= 2,000 hours
Now the optimal mix is 8,000 units of Trouble Spots massages and 1,333 units of
Full Body massages. This mix will precisely exhaust the masseuse time available.
* Differences due to rounding.
3. Total Contribution Margin of Optimal Mix = 8,000 units Trouble Spots × $90) +
(1,333 units* Full Body × $198)
= $983,934
BE 8-34
Price = Cost + (Markup Percentage × Cost)
= $750,000 + 0.10($750,000)
= $750,000 + $75,000
=
BE 8-35
1. Desired Profit = 0.20 × Target Price
= 0.20 × $600
= $120
2. Target Cost = Target Price – Desired Profit
= $600 – $120
= $480
Trouble Spots
30 minutes per Trouble Spots massage
60 minutes
= 6,000 hours – 4,000 hours
* 1.50 =
90 minutes per Full Body massage
0.50
$825,000
60 minutes
=
2,000 hours =
= 1.50 hours per unit Units of Full Body Massages to Be Offered
in Remaining 2,000 Hours 1,333 units*
8-16
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-36
The correct order is 4, 5, 2, 6, 3, and 1.
E 8-37
Steps in Austin’s decision:
Step 1: Define the problem. The problem is whether to continue studying at his
present university or to study at a university with a nationally recognized
engineering program.
Step 2: Identify the alternatives. Events a and b. (Students may want to include
Event i—possible study for a graduate degree. However, future events
indicate that Austin still defined his problem as in Step 1 above.)
Step 3: Identify the costs and benefits associated with each feasible alternative.
Events c, e, f, and i. (Students may also list Events e and f in Step 5—they are
included here because they may help Austin estimate future income benefits.)
Step 4: Total the relevant costs and benefits for each feasible alternative. No specific
event is listed for this step, although we can assume that it was done, and
that three schools were selected as feasible since Event j mentions that two
of three applications met with success.
Step 5: Assess qualitative factors. Events d, e, f, g, and h.
Step 6: Make the decision. Event j is certainly relevant to this and Event k is the
actual decision. [What did Austin ultimately decide? He decided to stay at
SMWU and finish his engineering degree. He also applied for—and won—
summer internships with large West Coast companies in the aerospace
industry. Currently, he’s applying for jobs and (Plan B) looking into graduate
programs.]
EXERCISES
8-17
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-38
1. The two alternatives are to make the component in-house or to buy it from Bryce.
2.
Make Buy
Direct materials………………………… $12.00 — $ 12.00
Direct labor……………………………… 8.25 — 8.25
Variable overhead……………………… 4.50 — 4.50
Purchase cost………………………… — $25.00 (25.00)
Total relevant cost………………… $24.75 $25.00 $ (0.25)
3. Zion should make the component in-house because operating income will be
$2,500 ($0.25 × 10,000) higher than if the part were purchased from Bryce.
E 8-39
1.
Make Buy
Direct materials………………………… $12.00 — $ 12.00
Direct labor……………………………… 8.25 — 8.25
Variable overhead……………………… 4.50 — 4.50
Avoidable fixed overhead*…………… 1.50 1.50
Purchase cost………………………… — $25.00 (25.00)
Total relevant cost………………… $26.25 $25.00 $ 1.25
* Avoidable fixed overhead is the 75% of fixed overhead that would be eliminated if the
component were no longer made in-house. Avoidable fixed overhead is relevant because if
Zion makes the component, it will incur the cost, but if the component is purchased, that fixed
overhead will not be incurred ($2.00 × 0.75 = $1.50).
Zion should purchase the component from Bryce because it will save $12,500
($1.25 × 10,000) over making it in-house.
Alternatives Differential
Alternatives Differential
Cost to Make
Cost to Make
8-18
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-39 (Concluded)
2. As the percentage of avoidable fixed cost increases (above 75%), total relevant
costs of making the component increase, causing the “purchase” decision to
be more financially appealing (compared to the “make” option) than it was when
the percentage was 75%. In other words, as the percentage increases, the $12,500
difference between the “purchase” and “make” options increases resulting in the
“purchase” decision being even more attractive. Alternatively, as the percentage
of avoidable fixed costs decreases, the “make” option eventually is equally costly
(a difference of zero) and as equally appealing financially as the “purchase” option.
Finally, as the percentage of avoidable fixed cost decreases low enough and the
total relevant costs of making the component decrease, the “make” option
becomes the more financially appealing option (i.e., when the relevant fixed costs
per unit become sufficiently small—which is explored in Requirement 3).
3. Total relevant avoidable fixed cost would need to decrease by $12,500. Total
relevant make costs of $262,500 need to decrease to $250,000 to equal the total
relevant buy costs. Holding all other relevant make costs constant, this decrease
of $12,500 ($262,500 – $250,000) in fixed cost would reduce the total relevant
avoidable fixed overhead from $15,000 (0.75 × $2 per unit × 10,000 units) or $1.50
per unit ($15,000/10,000 units) to $2,500 ($15,000 – $12,500) or $0.25 per unit
($2,500/10,000 units). Therefore, for Zion to be indifferent between “making”
versus “buying” the component (i.e., incur the same cost), the avoidable fixed
overhead cost would need to be $0.25 per unit ($2,500/10,000 units), which is 12.5%
($0.25/$2.00). In other words, the $1.50 per unit fixed cost (75% figure) would need
to decrease to $0.25 per unit (12.5%) before Zion is indifferent between “making”
versus “buying” the component.
8-19
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-40
1. The two alternatives are:
(1) to accept the special order
(2) to reject the special order
2. Direct materials…………………… $3.10
Direct labor………………………… 2.25
Variable overhead………………… 1.15
Total…………………………… $6.50
Relevant manufacturing costs are $6.50 per unit so the contribution margin
per unit from the special order is $0.50 ($7.00 – $6.50). The increase in total
contribution margin is $7,500 (15,000 × $0.50). Therefore, the special order
should be accepted.
3. The statement that “existing sales will not be affected” indicates that there will
be no product-line cannibalization; in other words, there is sufficient excess
capacity such that the acceptance of the special sales will not decrease Smooth
Move’s regular sales. Another consideration, possibly due to the geographic
separation, is that existing customers are less likely to learn of the new price,
which was $5 (or 42%) lower.
E 8-41
In this case, it may be easier to deal with the total costs and revenues of the special
order:
Revenue ($7.00 × 15,000)…………………………………………… $105,000
Less variable costs:
Direct materials ($3.30 × 15,000).……………………………… $49,500
Direct labor ($2.25 × 15,000)…………………………………… 33,750
Variable overhead ($1.15 × 15,000)…………………………… 17,250 100,500
Less labeling machine…………………………………….………… 12,000
Loss on special order………………………………….………… $ (7,500)
Smooth Move should reject the special order because it will reduce income by $7,500.
8-20
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-42
1.
Sweaters Jackets Total
Sales……………………….………………… $210,000 $450,000 $660,000
Less variable expenses:
Variable cost of goods sold…………… 145,000 196,000 341,000
Variable selling expense……………… 10,500 22,500 33,000
Contribution margin………………………. $ 54,500 $231,500 $286,000
Less direct fixed expenses:
Direct fixed overhead…………………… 25,000 47,000 72,000
Direct selling and administrative……… 20,000 50,000 70,000
Segment margin……………………….…… $ 9,500 $134,500 $144,000
Less common fixed expenses:
Common fixed overhead……………………….………………………… 45,000
Common selling and administrative……………………….…………… 15,000
Operating income……………………….……………………………………… $ 84,000
2. For the company as a whole, an increase of $10,000 in fixed expense will
result in a decrease in operating income to $74,000 ($84,000 – $10,000). If
the equipment is for the sweaters line, then that line’s segment margin will
be $(500), and management will need to consider whether the line should
be dropped. If profitability is not expected to improve (either by increasing
price or decreasing other costs), then the sweaters line should be dropped.
If the equipment is for the jackets line, while segment margin will decrease
to $124,500 ($134,500 – $10,000), it remains profitable and there will be no
need to drop it.
E 8-43
If Petoskey drops Conway, overall profit will decrease by $75,000 as a result of the
lost contribution margin ($300,000 – $225,000). Note that the direct fixed expense for
depreciation is a sunk cost and not relevant to the decision (i.e., it will remain
unchanged whether Conway is kept or dropped). Therefore, the overall impact of
dropping Conway is that profit decreases by the $75,000 lost contribution margin.
As a result, Petoskey should keep Conway because profits are higher with Conway
than without Conway.
Knitline Inc.
Segmented Income Statement
For the Coming Year
8-21
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-44
If Petoskey drops Conway, overall profit will increase by $5,000. Contribution margin will
decrease by $75,000 as a result of the lost contribution margin ($300,000 – $225,000).
Note that the fixed expense for depreciation is a sunk cost and not relevant to the
decision (i.e., it will remain unchanged whether Conway is kept or dropped). However,
Petoskey will avoid the $80,000 supervisory salary cost if it drops Conway. Therefore,
the overall impact of dropping Conway is that profit decreases by the $75,000 lost
contribution margin but increases by the lost supervisory salary of $80,000, which is
a net increase in profit of $5,000. Therefore, Petoskey should drop Conway because
profits are higher without Conway than with Conway.
E 8-45
If Petoskey drops Conway, profit will decrease by $28,000. There will be a decrease of
$75,000 as a result of the lost Conway contribution margin ($300,000 – $225,000). Note
that the direct fixed expense for depreciation is a sunk cost and not relevant to the
decision (i.e., it will remain unchanged whether Conway is kept or dropped). However,
Petoskey will avoid the $80,000 supervisory salary cost for Conway if it drops Conway.
Finally, if Petoskey drops Conway, 20% of Alanson’s contribution margin, or $33,000
(i.e., 0.20 × $165,000), will also be lost as Conway-loving customers shop elsewhere for
Alanson.
Therefore, the overall impact of dropping Conway is that profit decreases by the $75,000
lost Conway contribution margin, increases by the lost Conway supervisory salary of
$80,000, and decreases by the lost Alanson contribution margin of $33,000, which is
a net decrease in profit of $28,000. Therefore, Petoskey should keep Conway because
profits are higher with Conway than without Conway.
E 8-46
1. Contribution Margin if HS Is Sold at Split-Off = $9 × 14,000 pounds
= $126,000
2. Contribution margin if HS is processed into CS
Revenue ($45 × 4,000)……………………………… $180,000
Less further processing cost……………………… 34,000
Contribution margin………………………………… $146,000
Bozo should further process HS; profit from processing further will be $20,000 higher
($146,000 – $126,000) than if it were sold at split-off.
8-22
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-47
1. Reno Tahoe
Unit contribution margin………………………………………… $120 $75
÷ Painting department hours…………………………………… 5 3
Contribution margin per unit scarce resource…………… $ 24 $25
2. Assuming no other constraints, the optimal mix is zero units of Reno and 820
units of Tahoe. Total painting department time is 2,460 hours per year; if all of
them are devoted to Tahoe production, then 820 units (2,460/3) of Tahoe can
be produced.
3. Contribution Margin = ($120 × 0) + ($75 × 820) = $61,500
E 8-48
1. If 500 units of each product can be sold, then the company will first make and
sell 500 units of Tahoe (the product with the higher contribution margin per hour
of painting department time). This will take 1,500 hours (500 units × 3 hours)
of painting department time, leaving 960 hours (2,460 hours – 1,500 hours)
for Reno production. This time will yield 192 units (960 hours/5 hours per unit)
of Reno.
Optimal mix: 192 units Reno, 500 units Tahoe
2. Total Contribution Margin = ($120 × 192) + ($75 × 500) = $60,540
8-23
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-49
1. Price of National Parks Memory Card Game = $20.00 + (0.65 × $20) = $33.00
2. Price of Guess This Animal Track Game = $40.00 + (0.65 × $40) = $66.00
3. The financial manager might encounter one or more common challenges to using
cost-plus (or markup) pricing. One challenge might be identifying the most
appropriate percentage by which to mark up gift shop costs. For example, if the
percentage is too high (and 65% seems high), the manager risks setting prices
too high, thereby causing some customers to decide not to buy the gift shop’s
products. One factor working in the manager’s favor in this environment is that
businesses in remote locations, such as many national park gift shops, face
little or no competition. This can spur customers to spend more money than
they would when more competition exists. Alternatively, if the markup percentage
is too low, the manager risks setting prices too low. When prices are too low,
profits are less than they would be with higher prices. In extreme cases, profits
can be negative if total revenues are less than total costs.
Another challenge might be accurately estimating the costs on which the markup
percentage is applied. Even if the markup percentage is appropriate, marking up a
grossly inaccurate estimate of costs can result in consequences similar to those
described in the previous paragraph. For example, if reported costs are far too low,
the price and total revenues that result will be lower than they could be (or need to
be) to be profitable. If reported costs are far too high, the price will be too high,
and total revenues will be lower than if a more appropriate price, that customers
are willing to pay, is set.
E 8-50
1. Desired Profit = 0.20 × Target Price
= 0.20 × $60
= $12.00
2. Target Cost = Target Price – Desired Profit
= $60.00 – $12.00
= $48.00
8-24
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-51
1. The amounts Heather has spent on purchasing and improving the Grand Am a
irrelevant because these are sunk costs.
2.
Restore
Cost Item Grand Am
Transmission…………………………………… $2,000 $ 0
Water pump…………………………………… 400 0
Master cylinder………………………………… 1,100 0
Sell Grand Am………………………………… 0 (6,400)
Cost of new car………………………………… 0 9,400
Total………………………………………… $3,500 $ 3,000
Heather should sell the Grand Am and buy the Neon because it provides a net
savings of $3,500 – $3,000.
Note: Heather should consider the qualitative factors. If she restores the Gran
how much longer will it last? What about increased license fees and insurance
the newer car? Could she remove the stereo and put it in the Neon without gre
decreasing the Grand Am’s resale value?
E 8-52
1. If the analysis is done using total costs, each variable cost as well as the purc
price will be the unit cost multiplied by 35,000 units. The direct fixed overhead
$77,000 is avoidable if the part is purchased.
Make Buy
Direct materialsa……………………………… $210,000 $ 0
Direct laborb…………………………………… 70,000 0
Variable overheadc…………………………… 52,500 0
Fixed overhead………………………………… 77,000 0
Purchase costd………………………………… 0 385,000
Total relevant costs……………………… $409,500 $385,000
Blasingham should purchase the part.
2. Maximum Price = $409,500/35,000 = $11.70 per unit
3. Income would increase by $24,500 ($409,500 – $385,000).
a $6.00 × 35,000 = $210,000
b $2.00 × 35,000 = $70,000
c $1.50 × 35,000 = $52,500
d $11.00 × 35,000 = $385,000
Alternatives
Buy Neon
8-25
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
E 8-53
Make Buy
1. Direct materialsa…………………………… $210,000 $ 0
Direct laborb………………………………… 70,000 0
Variable overheadc………………………… 52,500 0
Purchase costd……………………………… 0 385,000
Total relevant costs…………………… $332,500 $385,000
Blasingham should continue manufacturing the part.
2. Maximum Price = $332,500/35,000 = $9.50 per unit
3. Income would decrease by $52,500 ($332,500 – $385,000).
a $6.00 × 35,000 = $210,000
b $2.00 × 35,000 = $70,000
c $1.50 × 35,000 = $52,500
d $11.00 × 35,000 = $385,000
8-26
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-54
1. If the special order is accepted:
Revenues ($7 × 100,000)……………………………………….………………… $ 700,000
Direct materials ($2 × 100,000)………………………………….………………… (200,000)
Direct labor ($1 × 100,000)……………………………………….………………… (100,000)
Variable overhead ($3 × 100,000)……………………………….………………… (300,000)
Total net benefit………………………………………………………………… $ 100,000
Fixed overhead and selling costs are irrelevant.
If the special order is rejected, there will be no impact on income. Therefore, the
quantitative analysis is $100,000 in favor of accepting the special order.
2. The qualitative factors are those that cannot be easily quantified. The company is
faced with a problem of idle capacity. Accepting the special order would bring
production up to near capacity and allow the company to avoid laying off
employees. This would also enhance the company’s community image.
The special-order price is well below the company’s normal price. Will this have a
potential impact on regular customers? Considering the fact that the customer is
located in a region not usually served by the company, the likelihood of an adverse
impact on regular business is not high. However, if it were likely and the amount
could be quantified, then it would represent a relevant item for consideration in the
analysis.
PROBLEMS
8-27
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-55
1.
Coffee
Blenders Makers Total
Sales……………………………………………… $1,560,000 $2,175,000 $3,735,000
Less: Variable cost of goods sold…………… 1,170,000 2,025,000 3,195,000
Contribution margin…………………………… $ 390,000 $ 150,000 $ 540,000
Less: Direct fixed expenses………………… 184,000 142,500 326,500
Segment margin………………………………… $ 206,000 $ 7,500 $ 213,500
Less: Common fixed expenses*…………………………………………………… 13,500
Operating income……………………………………………………………………… $ 200,000
* $340,000 – $184,000 – $142,500
2. If the coffee maker line is dropped, profits will decrease by $7,500, the segment
margin. If the blender line is dropped, profits will decrease by $206,000.
3. Coffee
Blenders Makers Total
Sales……………………………………………… $1,775,000 $2,175,000 $3,950,000
Less: Variable cost of goods sold…………… 1,350,000 2,025,000 3,375,000
Contribution margin…………………………… $ 425,000 $ 150,000 $ 575,000
Less: Direct fixed expenses………………… 184,000 142,500 326,500
Segment margin………………………………… $ 241,000 $ 7,500 $ 248,500
Less: Common fixed expenses*…………………………………………………… 13,500
Operating income……………………………………………………………………… $ 235,000
Profits increase by $35,000.
* $340,000 – $184,000 – $142,500
Alard Company
Segmented Income Statement
8-28
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-56
Scented Musical Regular Total
1. Sales…………………………………… $13,000 $19,500 $25,000 $57,500
Less: Variable expenses…………… 9,100 15,600 12,500 37,200
Contribution margin………………… $ 3,900 $ 3,900 $12,500 $20,300
Less: Direct fixed expenses……… 4,250 5,750 3,000 13,000
Product margin……………………… $ (350) $ (1,850) $ 9,500 $ 7,300
Less: Common fixed expenses………………………………………………… 7,500
Operating income (loss)………………………………………………………… $ (200)
Kathy should accept this proposal. The 30% sales increase, coupled with the
increased advertising, reduces the loss from $1,000 to $200. Both scented and
musical product-line profits increase. However, more must be done. If the
scented and musical product margins remain negative, the two products
may need to be dropped.
2. Regular:
Sales………………………………………………… $20,000
Less: Variable expenses………………………… 10,000
Contribution margin……………………………… $10,000
Less: Fixed expenses*…………………………… 10,500
Operating income (loss)…………………………… $ (500)
*$3,000 direct + $7,500 common
While dropping the two lines results in a $500 loss versus the original
$1,000 loss, it is worse than the alternative offered in Requirement 1.
Other options need to be developed.
3. Combinations would be beneficial. Dropping the musical line (which
shows the greatest segment loss) and keeping the scented line while
increasing advertising yields a profit (the optimal combination).
Scented Regular Total
Sales…………………………………………………… $13,000 $22,500 $35,500
Less: Variable expenses…………………………… 9,100 11,250 20,350
Contribution margin………………………………… $ 3,900 $11,250 $15,150
Less: Direct fixed expenses……………………… 4,250 3,000 7,250
Product margin……………………………………… $ (350) $ 8,250 $ 7,900
Less: Common fixed expenses………………………………………………… 7,500
Operating income………………………………………………………………… $ 400
8-29
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-57
1. Cost Item Make Buy
Raw materialsa………………………………………………… $218,000 $ 0
Direct laborb…………………………………………………… 70,200 0
Variable overheadc…………………………………………… 20,800 0
Fixed overheadd……………………………………………… 58,000 0
Purchase coste……………………………………………… 0 340,000
$367,000 $340,000
Net savings by purchasing: $367,000 – $340,000 = $27,000.
Hetrick should purchase the crowns rather than make them.
Depreciation of $5,000 is irrelevant (and therefore excluded from the analysis
here) because it will NOT change regardless of whether Hetrick makes or
buys the crowns.
a ($70 × 2,000 Porcelain) + ($130 × 600 Gold) = $218,000
b $27 × (2,000 + 600) = $70,200
c $8 × (2,000 + 600) = $20,800
d $26,000 + $32,000 = $58,000
e ($125 × 2,000) + ($150 × 600) = $340,000
8-30
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-57 (Concluded)
2. Qualitative factors that Hetrick should consider include quality of crowns, reliability
and promptness of producer, and reduction of workforce.
3. It reduces the cost of making the crowns to $335,000 ($367,000 – $32,000), which
is less than the cost of buying because fixed overhead decreases to $26,000 for
a total relevant make cost of $5,000 less than the buy cost. Therefore, Hetrick
should make the crowns.
4. Cost Item Make Buy
Raw materialsa………………………………………………… $372,000 $ 0
Direct laborb…………………………………………………… 129,600 0
Variable overheadc…………………………………………… 38,400 0
Fixed overhead………………………………………………… 58,000 0
Purchase costd………………………………………………… 0 615,000
$598,000 $615,000
Hetrick should produce its own crowns if demand increases to this level because
the fixed overhead is spread over more units.
a ($70 × 4,200 Porcelain) + ($130 × 600 Gold) = $372,000
b $27 × (4,200 + 600) = $129,600
c $8 × (4,200 + 600) = $38,400
d ($125 × 4,200) + ($150 × 600) = $615,000
P 8-58
Process
Per 600 lbs. Further Sell Difference
Revenuesa…………………………………… $24,000 $7,200 $16,800
Bagsb…………………………………………… 0 (39) 39
Shippingc……………………………………… (384) (60) (324)
Grindingd……………………………………… (1,500) 0 (1,500)
Bottlese………………………………………… (2,400) 0 (2,400)
$19,716 $7,101 $12,615
a 600 × 10 × $4 = $24,000;
$12 × 600 = $7,200
b $1.30 × (600/20)
c [(10 × 600)/25] × $1.60 = $384;
$0.10 × 600 = $60
d $2.50 × 600 = $1,500
e 10 × 600 × $0.40 = $2,400
Zanda should process depryl further.
2. $12,615/600 = $21.025 additional income per pound
$21.025 × 265,000 = $5,571,625
8-31
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-59
1. System A System B Headset Total
Sales……………………………………… $45,000 $32,500 $8,000 $85,500
Variable expenses……………………… 20,000 25,500 3,200 48,700
Contribution margin…………………… $25,000 $ 7,000 $4,800 $36,800
Direct fixed cost……………………… 526 11,158 1,016 12,700
Segment margin…………………… $24,474 $ (4,158) $3,784 $24,100
Common fixed cost…………………… 18,000
Operating income………………… $ 6,100
* $45,000/$85,500 × $18,000 = $9,474;
$10,000 – $9,474 = $526
** $32,500/$85,500 × $18,000 = $6,842;
$18,000 – $6,842 = $11,158
*** $8,000/$85,500 × $18,000 = $1,684;
$2,700 – $1,684 = $1,016
2. System A Headset Total
Sales……………………………………… $58,500 $6,000 $64,500
Variable expenses……………………… 26,000 2,400 28,400
Contribution margin…………………… $32,500 $3,600 $36,100
Direct fixed cost……………………… 526 1,016 1,542
Segment margin…………………… $31,974 $2,584 $34,558
Common fixed cost…………………… 18,000
Operating income………………… $16,558
System B should be dropped.
3. System A System C Headset Total
Sales……………………………………… $45,000 $26,000 $7,200 $78,200
Variable expenses……………………… 20,000 13,000 2,880 35,880
Contribution margin…………………… $25,000 $13,000 $4,320 $42,320
Direct fixed cost*……………………… 526 11,158 1,016 12,700
Segment margin…………………… $24,474 $ 1,842 $3,304 $29,620
Common fixed cost…………………… 18,000
Operating income………………… $11,620
Replacing B with C is better than keeping B, but not as good as dropping B
without replacement with C.
* ** ***
8-32
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-60
1. Steve should consider selling the part for $1.85 because his division’s profits would
increase $12,800:
Accept Reject
Revenues (2 × $1.85 × 8,000)………………………………… $29,600 $0
Variable expenses (2 × $1.05 × 8,000)……………………… 16,800 0
Total…………………………………………………………… $12,800 $0
Pat’s divisional profits would increase by $18,400:
Accept Reject
Revenues ($32 × 8,000)………………………………………… $ 256,000 $0
Variable expenses:
Direct materials ($17 × 8,000)……………………………… (136,000) 0
Direct labor ($7 × 8,000)…………………………………… (56,000) 0
Overhead ($2 × 8,000)……………………………………… (16,000) 0
Component ($2 × $1.85 × 8,000)…………………………… (29,600) 0
Total relevant benefits………………………………………… $ 18,400 $0
2. Pat should accept the $2 price. This price will increase the cost of the component
from $29,600 to $32,000 (2 × $2 × 8,000) and yield an incremental benefit of $16,000
($18,400 – $2,400).
Steve’s division will see an increase in profit of $15,200 (8,000 units × 2 components
per unit × $0.95 contribution margin per component).
3. Yes. At full price, the total cost of the component is $36,800 (2 × $2.30 × 8,000), an
increase of $7,200 over the original offer. This still leaves an increase in profits of
$11,200 ($18,400 – $7,200). (See the answer to Requirement 1.)
P 8-61
1. Markup based on cost of goods sold:
Cost of Goods Sold + (Cost of Goods Sold × Markup) = Sell Price
$48,100 + ($48,100 × Markup) = $130,000
Markup = ($130,000 – $48,100)/$48,100
= 1.703, or 170.3%
2. Direct materials……………………………… $ 1,800
Direct labor…………………………………… 1,600
Overhead……………………………………… 800
Total cost…………………………………… $ 4,200
Add: Markup ($4,200 × 1.703)……………… 7,153
Initial bid…………………………………… $11,353
8-33
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-62
Basic Standard Deluxe
1. Price……………………………………………… $ 9.00 $30.00 $35.00
Variable cost……………………………………… 6.00 20.00 10.00
Contribution margin…………………………… $ 3.00 $10.00 $25.00
÷ Machine hours………………………………… 0.10 0.50 0.75
Contribution margin per
machine hour…………………………………… $30.00 $20.00 $33.33
The company should sell only the deluxe unit with contribution margin per
machine hour of $33.33. Sealing can produce 20,000 (15,000/0.75) deluxe units
per year. These 20,000 units, multiplied by the $25 contribution margin per
unit, would yield a total contribution margin of $500,000.
2. First, produce and sell 12,000 deluxe units, which would use 9,000 machine
hours (12,000 × 0.75). Then, produce and sell 50,000 basic units, which would
use 5,000 machine hours (50,000 × 0.10). Finally, with the remaining 1,000
machine hours, produce 2,000 standard units.
Total Contribution Margin = ($25 × 12,000) + ($3 × 50,000) + ($10 × 2,000)
= $470,000
* Rounded
P 8-63
1. The company should not accept the offer because the additional revenue is
less than the additional costs (assuming fixed overhead is allocated and will
not increase with the special order):
Incremental revenue per box………………………………………………… $ 4.20
Incremental cost per box…………………………………………………… 4.25
Loss per box………………………………………………………………… $(0.05)
Total loss: $0.05 × 5,000 = ($250)
2. Costs associated with the layoff:
Increase state UI premiums (0.01 × $1,460,000)………………………… $14,600
Notification costs ($25 × 20)………………………………………………… 500
Rehiring and retraining costs ($150 × 20)………………………………… 3,000
Total………………………………………………………………………… $18,100
The order should be accepted. The loss of $250 on the order is more than
offset by the $18,100 savings by not laying off employees.
*
8-34
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-64
1. Sales………………………………………………………………………………… $263,000
Costs………………………………………………………………………………… 223,000
Operating profit……………………………………………………………… $ 40,000
Process
2. Sell Further Difference
Revenues………………………………… $40,000 $75,000 $35,000
Further processing cost………………… 0 23,900 23,900
Operating income (loss)…………… $40,000 $51,100 $11,100
The company should process Delta further because gross profit would increase by
$11,100 if it were processed further. (Note: Joint costs are irrelevant to this decision
because the company will incur them whether or not Delta is processed further.)
P 8-65
1. ($30 × 2,000) + ($60 × 4,000) = $300,000
2. Juno Hera
Contribution margin………………………………………… $30 $60
÷ Pounds of material………………………………………… 2 5
Contribution margin/pound………………………………… $15 $12
Norton should make as much of Juno as can be sold and then make Hera.
2,000 units of Juno × 2 lbs. per unit = 4,000 pounds
16,000 pounds – 4,000 pounds = 12,000 pounds for Hera
Hera Production = 12,000 lbs. per unit/5 lbs. per unit = 2,400 units
Product mix is 2,000 Juno and 2,400 Hera.
Total Contribution Margin = ($30 × 2,000) + ($60 × 2,400)
= $204,000
8-35
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-66
1. Process
Sell Further
Revenues……………………… $24,000 $33,000 $ 9,000
Processing cost……………… — (4,100) (4,100)
Total………………………… $24,000 $28,900 $ 4,900
Germain should be processed further as it will increase profit by $4,900
for every 1,000 liters.
2. Process
Sell Further
Revenues……………………… $24,000 $33,000 $ 9,000
Processing cost……………… — (4,100) (4,100)
Distribution cost……………… — (800) (800)
Commissions………………… — (3,300) (3,300)
Total………………………… $24,000 $24,800 $ 800
Germain should be processed further as it will increase profit by $800 for every
1,000 liters. Note that the liability issue was not quantified so it would need to
be considered as a qualitative factor, further reducing the attractiveness of
making geraiten.
P 8-67
1. Monthly cost for FirstBank:
Checking accounts:
Maintenance fees ($5 × 6)………………………….……… $ 30
Foreign DR/CR ($0.10 × 200)……………………………… 20
Returned checks ($3 × 25)…….…………………………… 75
Earnings on deposits ($0.50 × 300)……………………… (150) $ (25)
Credit card fees ($0.50 × 4,000)……………………………… 2,000
Wire transfers [($15 × 40) + ($50 × 60)]……………………… 3,600
Line of credit charges (0.06/12 × $100,000)………………… 500
Internet banking charges………………………………….…… 20
Total monthly charges…………………………………….… $6,095
One-time Internet setup fees ($15 × 6 accounts)………… $ 90
Differential Amount
to Process Further
Differential Amount
to Process Further
8-36
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
P 8-67 (Concluded)
Monthly cost for Community Bank:
Checking accounts: Returned checks ($2 × 25)…….…………… $ 50
Credit card fees
Per item ($0.50 × 4,000)…………………………………………… $2,000
Batch processing ($7 × 20)……………………………………… 140 2,140
Wire transfers ($30 × 100)…….……………………………………. 3,000
Line of credit charges (0.07/12)($100,000)………………………… 583
Total monthly charges…………………………………………… $5,773
Monthly cost for RegionalOne Bank:
Checking accounts:
Foreign DR/CR ($0.20 × 200)…………………………………… $ 40
Returned checks ($3.80 × 25)…………………………………… 95
Earnings on deposits ($0.30 × 300)…………………………… (90) $ 45
Credit card fees ($0.50 × 4,000)…………………………………… 2,000
Wire transfers [($10 × 40) + ($55 × 60)]…………………………… 3,700
Line of credit charges (0.065/12)($100,000)……………………… 542
Internet banking charges………………………………….………… 20
Total monthly charges………………………………….………… $6,307
* Answers rounded to the nearest dollar.
Community Bank has the lowest overall monthly fees. On quantitative factors
alone, it would be chosen.
2. If the full online banking access were crucial, Community Bank would be eliminated
immediately. This leaves FirstBank and RegionalOne Bank. The two sets of monthly
costs are similar, $6,095 for FirstBank versus $6,307 for RegionalOne. Now, the
banking relationship, comfort level of Kicker with the loan officer, and confidence
in the bank’s ability to respond quickly and appropriately to Kicker’s needs will be
the deciding factors. Additionally, some further negotiation would probably be
done—for example, on the interest rate on the line of credit.
*
*
8-37
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
Case 8-68
1. Pamela should not have told Roger about the deliberations concerning the power
department because this is confidential information. She had been explicitly told
to keep the details quiet but deliberately informed the head of the unit affected by the
potential decision. (Standard II: 1) Her revelation may be interpreted as actively or
passively subverting the attainment of the organization’s legitimate and ethical
objectives.
2. The romantic relationship between Pamela and Roger sets up a conflict of interest
for this particular decision. Pamela should have withdrawn from any active role in it.
(Standard III: 1) However, she should definitely provide the information she currently
has about the cost of eliminating the power department. To not do so would be active
subversion of the organization’s legitimate and ethical objectives. Moreover, she has
the obligation to communicate information fairly and to disclose all relevant
information that could reasonably be expected to influence an intended user’s
understanding. In addition, however, Pamela should discuss the qualitative effects
of eliminating the power department. The effects on workers, community relations,
reliability of external service, and any ethical commitments the company may have
to its workers should all enter into the decision. Pamela should communicate the
short-term quantitative effects and express any concerns about the qualitative
factors. She should also project what the costs of operating internally would be for
the next 5 years and compare that with the estimates of the costs of external
acquisition. Pamela also might consider the potential cost of laying off workers,
such as unemployment insurance costs, severance pay, etc. Later, if business
improves, Pamela would then have to incur costs for training any new employees
or formerly laid off employees that are hired back.
CASES
8-38
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 8 Tactical Decision Making and Relevant Analysis
Case 8-69
1. Salesa…………………………………………………… $3,751,500
Less: Variable expensesb…………………………… 2,004,900
Contribution margin…………………………………… $1,746,600
Less: Direct fixed expensesc………………………… 1,518,250
Divisional margin……………………………………… $ 228,350
Less: Common fixed expensesc…………………… 299,250
Operating (loss)……………………………………… $ (70,900)
a Based on sales of 41,000 units
Let X = Units sold
$83X/2 + $100X/2 = $3,751,500
$183X = $7,503,000
X = 41,000 units
b $83X/125.0% $66.40 Manufacturing cost
– 20.00 Fixed overhead
$46.40 Per internal unit variable cost
+ 5.00 Selling expenses
$51.40 Per external unit variable cost
Variable Costs = ($46.40 × 20,500) + ($51.40 × 20,500)
= $2,004,900
c Fixed selling and admin.: $1,100,000 – $5(20,500) = $997,500
Direct fixed selling and admin.: 0.70 × $997,500 = $698,250
Direct fixed overhead: $20 × 41,000 = $820,000
Total direct fixed expenses = $698,250 + $820,000 = $1,518,250
Common fixed expenses = 0.30 × $997,500 = $299,250
2. Keep Drop
Sales……………………………………………………… $ 3,751,500 $ —
Variable costs…………………………………………… (2,004,900) (2,050,000)
Direct fixed expenses………………………………… (1,518,250) —
Annuity…………………………………………………… — 100,000
Total…………………………………………………… $ 228,350 $(1,950,000)
* $100 × 20,500 (The units transferred internally must be purchased externally.)
The company should keep the division.
Case 8-70
Answers will vary.
*
8-39
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

PROCESS COSTING

1. Process costing collects costs by process (department) for a given period of time. Unit
costs are computed by dividing these costs by the department’s output measured for the
same period of time. Job-order costing collects costs by job. Unit costs are computed by
dividing the job’s costs by the units produced in the job. Process costing is typically used
for industries where units are homogeneous and mass-produced. Job-order costing is used
for industries that produce heterogeneous products (often custom-made).
2. In sequential processing, products pass through a series of processes, one after another
(i.e., in a given sequence). In parallel processing, products pass through two or more
different sequences at the same time, merging eventually at the final process.
3. The cost flows for process-costing and job-order costing systems are essentially the same.
Process costing requires a work-in-process account for each process/producing department.
Costs flow from one work-in-process account to another until the final process is reached.
4. The work-in-process account of the receiving department is debited, and the work-in-process
account of the transferring department is credited. The finished goods account is debited,
and the work-in-process account of the final department is credited upon completion
of the product.
5. Service firms generally do not have work-in-process inventories, and so equivalent units of
production are not needed. An important factor in process costing for services is determining
just what constitutes a unit of output.
6. Firms adopting JIT reduce inventories to very low levels. As a result, work-in-process
inventories are close to zero, and equivalent units of production need not be calculated.
In essence, unit cost is total cost for the period divided by output.
7. Equivalent units are the number of whole units that could have been produced, given the amount
of materials, labor, and overhead used. Equivalent units are the measure of a period’s output,
a necessary input for the computation of unit costs in a process-costing system.
8. In calculating this period’s unit cost, the weighted average combines the work and costs in
beginning inventory with current-period costs and work to calculate this period’s unit cost. The
FIFO method excludes any costs and output carried over from the prior period’s unit cost
computation; hence, only current work and costs are used to calculate this period’s unit cost.
9. If the per-unit cost of the prior period is the same as the per-unit cost of the current period,
there will be no difference between the results of the weighted average and FIFO methods.
Additionally, if no beginning work-in-process inventory exists, both the FIFO and weighted
average methods give the same results.
6 PROCESS COSTING
DISCUSSION QUESTIONS
6-1
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
10. The first step is the preparation of a physcial flow schedule. This schedule identifies the physical
units that must be accounted for and provides an accounting for these units. The second step is
the equivalent unit schedule. This schedule computes the equivalent whole output for the period.
The schedule’s computations rely on information from the physical flow schedule. The third step is
computation of the unit cost. To compute the unit cost, the manufacturing costs of the period for the
process are divided by the period’s output. The output is obtained from the equivalent unit schedule.
The fourth step uses the unit cost to value goods transferred out and those remaining in work in
process. The final step checks to see if the costs assigned in Step 4 equal the total costs to account
for.
11. A production report summarizes the activities and costs associated with a process for a given
period. It shows the physical flow, the equivalent units, the unit cost, and the values of ending
work in process and goods transferred out. The report serves the same function as a job-order
cost sheet in a job-order costing system.
12. Separate equivalent units must be calculated for each category of materials and for conversion
costs.
13. Transferred-in units represent partially completed units and are clearly a material for the
receiving department. To complete the product (or further process it), additional materials
and conversion costs are added by the receiving department.
14. The weighted average method uses the same unit cost for all goods transferred out. The FIFO
method divides goods transferred out into two categories: units started and completed and
units from beginning work in process. The period’s unit cost is used to value goods started
and completed. The cost of goods transferred out from beginning work in process is obtained
by (1) assigning them all costs carried over from the prior period and (2) using the current
period’s unit cost to value the equivalent units completed this period.
6-2
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
6-1. d
6-2. c
6-3. b
6-4. d
6-5. d
6-6. b 0 + 2,300 units + (500 units × 0.4) = 2,500 units
6-7. b $46,000/[0 + 2,300 units + (500 units × 0.4)] = $18.40
6-8. a $18.40 × 2,300 units transferred = $42,320
(see M.C. 6-7 for calculation of $18.40)
6-9. c $18.40 × (500 units × 0.40) = $3,680
(see M.C. 6-7 for calculation of $18.40)
6-10. d 100,000 units transferred + (25,000 units × 0.40) = 110,000 units
6-11. e 100,000 units transferred + (25,000 units × 0.80) = 120,000 units
6-12. c ($112,500 + $450,000)/125,000 units = $4.50 per unit
100,000 units transferred × $4.50 = $450,000
6-13. c ($100,000 + $550,000)/100,000 units = $6.50
6-14. e (25,000 × 0.20) + 80,000 + (25,000 × 0.60) = 100,000 units
6-15. b (25,000 × 0.80) + 80,000 + (25,000 × 0.80) = 120,000 units
6-16. d $720,000/120,000 units = $6.00
6-17. b $450,000/125,000 EU = $3.60 per unit
100,000 units transferred × $3.60 per unit = $360,000
6-18. a
6-19. c
6-20. d
MULTIPLE-CHOICE QUESTIONS
6-3
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-21
Mixing Cooking Packaging
1. Direct materials……………………… $ 825,000 $ 379,500 $ 330,000
Direct labor…………………………… 120,000 75,000 180,000
Applied overhead…………………… 225,000 82,500 332,500
Transferred-in cost…………………… — 1,170,000 1,707,000
Total cost…………………………… $1,170,000 $1,707,000 $2,549,500
2.
Debit
Work in Process—Cooking 1,170,000
Work in Process—Mixing 1,170,000
Work in Process—Packaging 1,707,000
Work in Process—Cooking 1,707,000
Finished Goods 2,549,500
Work in Process—Packaging 2,549,500
BE 6-22
Equivalent Units
Units completed………………………………………………
EWIP (0.40 × 16,800)…………………….……………………
Output…………………………………………………………
BE 6-23
1. Equivalent Units
Units completed……………………………………………
EWIP (0.60 × 112,500)…………………….………………
Output……………………………………………………
Unit Cost = $2,295,000/382,500………………..………
2. Cost of goods tranferred out ($6 × 315,000)….………
Cost of EWIP ($6 × 67,500)…………….………………
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET A
112,000
Journal
Date Description Credit
$1,890,000
405,000
6,720
118,720
315,000
67,500
382,500
$6.00
6-4
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-24
1. Equivalent
Units
Units completed…………………………………………………………… 720,000
EWIP (0.40 × 225,000)……………………………………………………… 90,000
Output for January……………………………………………….………… 810,000
2. Unit Cost = $1,215,000/810,000…………………..……………………… $1.50
3. Cost of goods tranferred out ($1.50 × 720,000)……………………… $1,080,000
EWIP ($1.50 × 90,000)……………………………………………………… 135,000
BE 6-25
Physical flow schedule:
Units in BWIP (80% complete)……………………… 160,000
Units started…………………………………………… 720,000
Total units to account for………………………… 880,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Units started and completed……………………… 600,000
Units completed from BWIP………………………… 160,000 760,000
Units in EWIP (60% complete)……………………… 120,000
Total units accounted for………………………… 880,000
BE 6-26
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP………… 4,000 Units completed……………… 27,200
Units started…………………… 31,200 Units in ending WIP………… 8,000
Total units to acct. for………35,200 Total units acct’d. for…… 35,200
Equivalent units:
Units completed…………………………………………………………………… 27,200
Units in ending work in process……………………………………………… 4,800
Total equivalent units………………………………………………………… 32,000
Manzer Inc.
Production Report
For the Month of October
Weighted Average Method
UNIT INFORMATION
Cutting Department
6-5
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-26
Costs to account for:
Beginning work in process…………………………………………………… $ 32,000
Incurred during October………………………………………………………… 608,000
Total costs to account for…………………………………………………… $640,000
Cost per equivalent unit…………………………………………………………… $20.00
Costs accounted for:
Transferred
Out Total
Goods transferred out
($20.00 × 27,200)………………………… $544,000 — $544,000
Goods in ending WIP
($20.00 × 4,800)………………………… — $96,000 96,000
Total costs accounted for……………… $544,000 $96,000 $640,000
BE 6-27
1. Materials Conversion
Units completed………………………………………………… 65,200 65,200
Add: Units in ending WIP ×
Fraction complete (12,000 × 1; 12,000 × 0.60)…… 12,000 7,200
Equivalent units of output……………………………..…… 77,200 72,400
2.
Unit materials cost [($40,980 + $125,000)/77,200]……………………………… $2.15
Unit conversion cost [($28,920 + $210,000)/72,400]…………………………… 3.30
Total unit cost……………………………………………………………………… $5.45
*Rounded
3.
Cost transferred out (65,200 × $5.45)…………………………………………… $355,340
Cost of ending WIP:
Materials (12,000 × $2.15)……………………………………………………… $ 25,800
Conversion (7,200 × $3.30)……………………………………………………… 23,760
Total ending WIP cost……………………………………………………… $ 49,560
COST INFORMATION
Ending
Work in Process
*
*
6-6
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-28
1. Physical flow schedule:
Units in beginning work in process………………………… 70,000
Units started during the period……………………………… 240,000
Total units to account for…………………………………… 310,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Units started and completed…………………………………… 192,500
Units completed from beginning work in process………… 70,000 262,500
Units in ending work in process……………………………… 47,500
Total units accounted for…………………………………… 310,000
2. Units completed…………………………………..………………… 262,500
Units in EWIP………………………………………………………… 47,500
Equivalent units (transferred-in materials)………………… 310,000
3. Unit Transferred-In Cost = ($283,000 + $957,000)/310,000…… $4.00
BE 6-29
Equivalent
Units
1. Units started and completed…………………………………………………… 570,000
Units in BWIP (0.20 × 120,000)…………………………………………………… 24,000
Units in EWIP (0.75 × 80,000)…………………………………………………… 60,000
Total……………………………………………………………………………… 654,000
2. Unit Cost = $1,471,500/654,000………………………………………………… $2.25
3. Cost of units transferred out:
BWIP costs……………………………………………………………………… $ 120,000
To finish BWIP………………………………………………………………… 54,000
Started and completed……………………………….………………………… 1,282,500
Total……………………………………………….………………………… $1,456,500
EWIP ($2.25 × 60,000)….….……………………………….……………………… $135,000
6-7
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-30
Physical flow:
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP……… 120,000 Units accounted for:
Units started……………………650,000 Units started and completed… 570,000
From beginning WIP…………… 120,000
Total units to acct. for…… 770,000 Units in ending WIP……………… 80,000
Total units acct’d. for……… 770,000
Equivalent units:
Started and completed………………………………………………..……………… 570,000
To complete beginning WIP (120,000 × 0.20)…………………………………… 24,000
Units in ending WIP (80,000 × 0.75)………………………………………………… 60,000
Total equivalent units……………………………………………………………… 654,000
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP……………………………………………………………… $ 120,000
Costs added by department………………………………………………………… 1,471,500
Total costs to account for………………………………………………………… $1,591,500
Cost per Equivalent Unit = $1,471,500/654,000……………………………………… $2.25
Costs accounted for:
Transferred out:
Units started and completed (570,000 × $2.25)……………………………… $1,282,500
Units in beginning work in process:
From prior period………………………………………………………….……… 120,000
From current period (24,000 × $2.25)………………………………………… 54,000
Total cost transferred out………………………………………….…………… $1,456,500
Goods in ending work in process (60,000 × $2.25)………………………………… 135,000
Total costs accounted for……………………………………..…………………… $1,591,500
*Any difference due to rounding
UNIT INFORMATION
COST INFORMATION
Aztec Inc.
Mixing Department
Production Report
For the Month of July
(FIFO Method)
*
6-8
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-31
Mixing Cooking Packaging
1. Direct materials………………………………… $600,500 $ 285,500 $ 250,000
Direct labor……………………………………… 90,000 50,000 120,000
Applied overhead……………………………… 117,000 65,000 156,000
Transferred-in cost…………………………… — 807,500 1,208,000
Total cost…………………………………… $807,500 $1,208,000 $1,734,000
2.
Debit
Work in Process—Cooking 807,500
Work in Process—Mixing 807,500
Work in Process—Packaging 1,208,000
Work in Process—Cooking 1,208,000
Finished Goods 1,734,000
Work in Process—Packaging 1,734,000
BE 6-32
Equivalent Units
Units completed…………………………………………………………
EWIP (0.30 × 15,750)…………………….…………………………….
Output…………………………………………………………………
BE 6-33
1. Equivalent Units
Units completed……………………………………………………
EWIP (0.70 × 42,700)…………………….…………………………
Output……………………………………………………………
Unit Cost = $1,759,120/219,890………………..…………………
2. Cost of goods tranferred out ($8 × 190,000)….………………
Cost of EWIP ($8 × 29,890)…………….……………………….
BRIEF EXERCISES: SET B
$1,520,000
239,120
190,000
29,890
219,890
$8.00
105,000
4,725
109,725
Journal
Date Description Credit
6-9
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-34
1. Equivalent
Units
Units completed………………………………………………………………………… 360,000
EWIP (0.40 × 112,500)…………………………………………………………………… 45,000
Output for July……………………………………………….…………………………… 405,000
2. Unit Cost = $607,500/405,000…………………..……………………………………… $1.50
3. Cost of goods tranferred out ($1.50 × 360,000)…………………………………… $540,000
EWIP ($1.50 × 45,000)…………………………………………………………………… 67,500
BE 6-35
Physical flow schedule:
Units in BWIP (60% complete)…………………………………… 60,000
Units started………………………………………………………… 230,000
Total units to account for……………………………………… 290,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Units started and completed……………………………………… 185,000
Units completed from BWIP……………………………………… 60,000 245,000
Units in EWIP (80% complete)…………………………………… 45,000
Total units accounted for……………………………………… 290,000
BE 6-36
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP……… 15,000 Units completed……………… 102,000
Units started…………………… 117,000 Units in ending WIP………… 30,000
Total units to acct. for…… 132,000 Total units acct’d for……… 132,000
Equivalent units:
Units completed……………………………………………………………………… 102,000
Units in ending work in process…………………………………………………… 18,000
Total equivalent units…………………………………………………………… 120,000
UNIT INFORMATION
Washburn Inc.
Production Report
For the Month of June
Weighted Average Method
Molding Department
6-10
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-36 (Concluded)
Costs to account for:
Beginning work in process…………………………………………………… $ 180,000
Incurred during June………………………………………………………… 3,420,000
Total costs to account for………………………………………………… $3,600,000
Cost per equivalent unit………………………………………………………… $30.00
Costs accounted for:
Transferred Ending
Out Work in Process Total
Goods transferred out
($30.00 × 102,000)……………………… $3,060,000 — $3,060,000
Goods in ending WIP
($30.00 × 18,000)……………………… — $540,000 540,000
Total costs accounted for……………… $3,060,000 $540,000 $3,600,000
BE 6-37
1. Materials Conversion
Units completed……………………………………………… 13,040 13,040
Units in ending WIP ×
Fraction complete (2,400 × 1; 2,400 × 0.60)…… 2,400 1,440
Equivalent units of output……………………………..… 15,440 14,480
2. Unit materials cost [($16,000 + $50,000)/15,440]……… $ 4.27
Unit conversion cost [($12,000 + $84,000)/14,480]…… 6.63
Total unit cost…………………………………………… $10.90
* Rounded
3. Cost transferred out (13,040 × $10.90)…………………… $142,136
Cost of ending WIP:
Materials (2,400 × $4.27)………………………………… $ 10,248
Conversion (1,440 × $6.63)…………………………… 9,547
Total ending WIP cost……………………………… $ 19,795
Add:
COST INFORMATION
*
*
6-11
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-38
1. Physical flow schedule:
Units in beginning work in process……………………………… 30,000
Units started during the period…………………………………… 120,000
Total units to account for……………………………………… 150,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Units started and completed……………………………………… 110,000
Units completed from beginning work in process…………… 30,000 140,000
Units in ending work in process………………………………… 10,000
Total units accounted for……………………………………… 150,000
2. Units completed…………………………………..…………………… 140,000
Units in EWIP…………………………………………………………… 10,000
Equivalent units (transferred-in materials)…………………… 150,000
3. Unit Transferred-In Cost = ($63,000 + $237,000)/150,000………… $2.00
BE 6-39
1. Units started and completed………………………………………………………… 28,500
Units in BWIP (0.30 × 6,000)………………………………………………………… 1,800
Units in EWIP (0.60 × 4,000)………………………………………………………… 2,400
Total…………………………………………………………………………………… 32,700
2. Unit Cost = $130,800/32,700………………………………………………………… $4.00
3. Cost of units transferred out:
BWIP costs…………………………………………………………………………… $ 16,380
To finish BWIP……………………………………………………………………… 7,200
Started and completed……………………………….…………………………… 114,000
Total……………………………………………….……………………………… $137,580
EWIP ($4.00 × 2,400)….….……………………………….…………………………… $9,600
Equivalent
Units
6-12
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
BE 6-40
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP………… 6,000 Units started and completed… 28,500
Units started……………………… 32,500 From beginning WIP…………… 6,000
Units in ending WIP…………… 4,000
Total units to acct. for……… 38,500 Total units acct’d for……… 38,500
Equivalent units:
Started and completed………………………………………………..………………… 28,500
To complete beginning WIP (6,000 × 0.30)………………………………………… 1,800
Units in ending WIP (4,000 × 0.60)…………………………………………………… 2,400
Total equivalent units……………………………………………………………… 32,700
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP………………………………………………………………… $ 16,380
Costs added by department…………………………………………………………… 130,800
Total costs to account for………………………………………………………… $147,180
Cost per Equivalent Unit = $130,800/32,700…………………………………………… $4.00
Transferred out:
Units started and completed (28,500 × $4.00)………………………………… $114,000
Units in beginning work in process:
From prior period………………………………………………………….………… 16,380
From current period (1,800 × $4.00)……………………………………………… 7,200
Total cost transferred out………………………………………….…………… $137,580
Goods in ending work in process (2,400 × $4.00)…………………………………… 9,600
Total costs accounted for……………………………………..……………………… $147,180
Saludable Inc.
Costs accounted for:
Drying Department
Production Report
For the Month of November
(FIFO Method)
COST INFORMATION
UNIT INFORMATION
6-13
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
E 6-41
1.
Direct materials………… $ 29,400
Direct labor……………… 68,400
Applied overhead……… 57,000
Transferred-in cost:
From Molding…………
From Grinding……… 718,600
Total cost………………… $873,400
2. Unit Cost = $873,400/18,000……….….………………………………………………… $48.52
E 6-42
1.
a. Work in Process—Grinding
Work in Process—Molding
b. Work in Process—Finishing
Work in Process—Grinding
c. Finished Goods
Work in Process—Finishing
2. The journal entries for the job-order and process-costing systems are generally
the same. There is one key difference. For process costing, each department has
its own WIP account. As goods are completed in one department, they are
transferred with their costs to the next department.
E 6-43
1. Equivalent
Units
21,600 units completed……………………………………………………………… 21,600
(2,250 units × 0.60)………………………………………………………………… 1,350
December output……………………………………………………………………… 22,950
2. Unit Cost per Unit = $82,620/22,950………………………………………………… $3.60
3. Cost of Goods Transferred Out = $3.60 × 21,600….……………………………… $77,760
4. EWIP = $3.60 × 1,350……………….…………..……………………………………… $4,860
$286,400
27,600
35,000
$349,000 $718,600
349,000
$ 30,400
67,200
272,000
232,000
272,000
128,000
128,000
Finishing
Department
EXERCISES
Description
Journal
Date
Department
Molding
Department
Grinding
Credit
232,000
272,000
Debit
6-14
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
E 6-44
Units completed……………………………………………………………………… 504,000
Units in ending work in process × Fraction complete:
(96,000 × 0.75)……………………………………………………………………… 72,000
Equivalent units of output………………………………………………………… 576,000
E 6-45
1. Unit Cost = $174,000/75,000 = $2.32 per unit
2. Cost of ending work in process ($2.32 × 21,600)………………………………… $50,112
Cost of goods tranferred out ($2.32 × 53,400)…………………………………… $123,888
3. Cassien is using the weighted average method for calculating unit costs. Thus, the
unit cost for June will be a mixture of May and June costs. May costs will not reflect
the cost savings and so the June unit cost will be higher than expected. Using FIFO
for June would better reflect the effect of the cost reductions and overcome the
problem.
E 6-46
1. Unit Cost = $1,100,000/220,000…………………………………………………… $5.00
2. Cost of units transferred out (196,000 × $5.00)……………………………… $ 980,000
Cost of ending WIP (24,000 × $5.00)…………………………………………… 120,000
Total costs accounted for…………………..………………………………… $1,100,000
3. The weighted average method is simpler to use than FIFO, but it does not reflect
the unit cost as well if costs are changing significantly from one period to the next.
FIFO calculates the unit cost using only costs of the current period and output of the
current period. Weighted average rolls back and picks up the costs and output in
BWIP and counts them as if they belong to the current period. These costs and
output of two periods are mixed. For Byford, the unit cost under weighted average
is $5.00 (see solution to Requirement 1). The unit cost for units in BWIP is $3.06
($107,000/35,000). This suggests a significant difference in the unit cost of the prior
period from the unit cost of the current period. If this type of cost fluctuation is
typical, Byford should switch to FIFO.
E 6-47
Units to account for:
Units in beginning work in process……………………………… 91,500
Units started during the period…………………………………… 99,000
Total units to account for……………………………………… 190,500
Units completed and transferred out:
Units started and completed*……………………………………… 73,800
Units completed from beginning work in process…………… 91,500 165,300
Units in ending work in process………………….……………… 25,200
Total units accounted for……………………………………… 190,500
*99,000 – 25,200 = 73,800
6-15
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
E 6-48
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP………………………………………………………………… 25,000
Units started……………………………………………………………………………… 142,500
Total units……………………………………………………………………………… 167,500
Units accounted for:
Completed from BWIP…………………………………………………………………… 25,000
Started and completed*………………………………………………………………… 107,500
Units in ending WIP……………………………………………………………………… 35,000
Total units……………………………………………………………………………… 167,500
142,500 – 35,000
E 6-49
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP………… 20,000 Units completed……………… 50,000
Units started……………………… 40,000 Units in ending WIP…………… 10,000
Total units to acct. for……… 60,000 Total units acct’d for……… 60,000
Equivalent units:
Units completed…………………………………………………………………………… 50,000
Units in ending work in process (0.20 × 10,000)…………………………………… 2,000
Total equivalent units………………………………………………………………… 52,000
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP………………………………………………………………… $ 93,600
Costs added by department…………………………………………………………… 314,600
Total costs to account for…………………………………………………………… $408,200
Cost per equivalent unit…………………………………………………………………… $7.85
UNIT INFORMATION
COST INFORMATION
Mino Inc.
Production Report
For the Month of April
(Weighted Average Method)
Cooking Department
6-16
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
E 6-49 (Concluded)
Costs accounted for:
Transferred
Out Total
Goods transferred out
($7.85 × 50,000)…..………… $392,500 — $392,500
Goods in ending WIP
($7.85 × 2,000)…..…………… — $15,700 15,700
Total costs accounted for….. $392,500 $15,700 $408,200
E 6-50
Materials Conversion
Units completed……………………..……………… 60,000 60,000
Units in ending WIP ×
Fraction complete* (20,000 × 0.60)…..…… 20,000 12,000
Equivalent units of output……………..…………… 80,000 72,000
*60% completion is related to conversion.
E 6-51
1. Unit materials cost [($147,000 + $1,053,000)/240,000]………………………… $5.00
Unit conversion cost [($7,875 + $236,205)/216,000]…………………………… 1.13
Total unit cost……………………………………………………………………… $6.13
2. Cost transferred out (180,000 × $6.13)…………………………………….….… $1,103,400
Cost of ending WIP:
Materials (60,000 × $5.00)……………………………………….….…………… $ 300,000
Conversion (36,000 × $1.13)…………………………………………………… 40,680
Total ending WIP cost……………………………………………………..…… $ 340,680
E 6-52
1. Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP…… 40,000 Units transferred out……… 120,000
Units started*……………… 110,000 Units in ending WIP………… 30,000
Total units to acct. for… 150,000 Total units acct’d for…… 150,000
Add:
Ending
Work in Process
6-17
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
E 6-52 (Concluded)
* Calculation:
Units transferred out……………..………………………………………………………… 120,000
Units in ending WIP……………..………………………………………………………… 30,000
Less: Units in beginning WIP…..………………………………………………………… (40,000)
Units transferred in………………..…………………………………………………… 110,000
2. Transferred-In Materials Conversion
Units transferred out……………… 120,000 120,000 120,000
Units in ending WIP………………… 30,000 30,000 18,000
Equivalent units………………… 150,000 150,000 138,000
E 6-53
1. Unit transferred-in cost [($2,100 + $30,900)/75,000]……..…………… $0.44
Unit materials cost [($1,500 + $22,500)/75,000]……..………………… 0.32
Unit conversion cost [($3,000 + $45,300)/69,000]……..……………… 0.70
2. Total unit cost…..……………..…………………………………………… $1.46
E 6-54
Units started and completed……..……………………………………… 27,000
Units in BWIP × Fraction to be completed (15,000 × 0.60)……..…… 9,000
Units in EWIP × Fraction complete (8,000 × 0.75)……..……………… 6,000
Equivalent units of output…………………………………..…………… 42,000
E 6-55
1. Unit Cost = $14,000/7,840……………………………………….………… $1.79
2. Cost of ending work in process ($1.79 × 2,400)……………..………… $ 4,296
Cost of goods transferred out:
From BWIP:
Prior-period costs…………………………………………..…………… $ 1,120
Completion costs ($1.79 × 840)…..…………………………………… 1,504
Started and completed ($1.79 × 4,600)………..…………………… 8,234
Total………..………………………………………………………… $10,858
* Rounded
*
*
6-18
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-56
1. Mixing department:
a. Units Transferred to Tableting = Total Units* – Ending WIP
= 420,000 – 36,000
*Total Units = Beginning WIP + Units Started = 0 + 420,000
b. Units completed………………………………………………….……………… 384,000
Add: Units in ending work in process: 36,000 × 0.50…………………… 18,000
Equivalent units of output…………..………………………………………… 402,000
2. Tableting department:
Units Transferred Out = Total Units* – Ending WIP = 408,000 – 12,000 = 396,000
*Total Units = Beginning WIP + Units Transferred In = 24,000 + 384,000 = 408,000
3. The solution is to convert the transferred-in units to the same unit of measure as
the output for the tableting department. Each bottle has eight ounces of transferredin
material. Thus, 384,000 ounces become 48,000 bottles. Using this converted
measure, the revised solution would be as follows:
Units Transferred Out = Total Units* – Ending WIP = 51,000 – 1,500 = 49,500
*Total Units = Beginning WIP + Units Transferred In = 3,000 + 48,000 = 51,000
P 6-57
1. Units to account for:
Units in beginning work in process………..…………………… 60,000
Units started during the period……………..…………………… 120,000
Total units to account for…………………..………………… 180,000
Units accounted for:
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed……………………..………………… 90,000
From beginning work in process…………..……………… 60,000 150,000
Units in ending work in process…………..…………………… 30,000
Total units accounted for…………………..………………… 180,000
PROBLEMS
= 384,000
6-19
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-57 (Concluded)
2. Cabinets Components Conversion
Units completed……………………………… 150,000 150,000 150,000
Units in EWIP………………………………… 30,000 30,000 6,000
Equivalent units…………………………… 180,000 180,000 156,000
*0.20 × 30,000
3. Costs to account for: Cabinets Components Conversion Total
Beginning WIP……………… $1,200,000 $12,600,000 $ 5,400,000 $19,200,000
Incurred during April……… 2,400,000 25,200,000 8,640,000 36,240,000
Total costs to acct. for… $3,600,000 $37,800,000 $14,040,000 $55,440,000
Equivalent units…………… 180,000 180,000 156,000
Cost per equivalent unit…… $20 $210 $90 $320
4. Costs Transferred Out = 150,000 × $320
=
Cost of Ending WIP = (30,000 × $20) + (30,000 × $210) + (6,000 × $90)
= $7,440,000
5. Costs to account for:
Beginning work in process………..…………………………………………… $19,200,000
Incurred during April………………..…………………………………………… 36,240,000
Total costs to account for………..………………………………………… $55,440,000
Costs accounted for:
Goods transferred out……………..…………………………………………… $48,000,000
Goods in ending work in process……..……………………………………… 7,440,000
Total costs accounted for……………..…………………………………… $55,440,000
$48,000,000
*
6-20
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-58
1.
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP…… 60,000 Units completed…………… 150,000
Units started………………… 120,000 Units in ending WIP………… 30,000
Total units to acct. for… 180,000 Total units acct’d. for…… 180,000
Equivalent units: Cabinets Components Conversion
Units completed……………………………… 150,000 150,000 150,000
Units in EWIP…………………………………… 30,000 30,000 6,000
Equivalent units…………………………… 180,000 180,000 156,000
Costs to account for: Cabinets Components Conversion Total
Beginning WIP……………… $1,200,000 $12,600,000 $ 5,400,000 $19,200,000
Incurred during April……… 2,400,000 25,200,000 8,640,000 36,240,000
Total costs to acct. for… $3,600,000 $37,800,000 $14,040,000 $55,440,000
Equivalent units……………… 180,000 180,000 156,000
Cost per equivalent unit…… $20 $210 $90 $320
Transferred Ending Work
Costs accounted for: Out in Process Total
Goods transferred out
($320 × 150,000)……………………………… $48,000,000 — $48,000,000
Goods in ending WIP
Cabinets ($20 × 30,000)…………………… $ 600,000 600,000
Components ($210 × 30,000)…………… 6,300,000 6,300,000
Conversion ($90 × 6,000)………………… — 540,000 540,000
Total costs accounted for…………… $48,000,000 $7,440,000 $55,440,000
*0.20 × 30,000
Unit Information
Stillwater Designs
Production Report
For the Month of April
(Weighted Average Method)
Assembly Department
*
6-21
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-58 (Concluded)
2. Although the answers may vary, some essential elements should be mentioned in
the report. The job cost sheet summarizes the manufacturing activity for a job,
whereas the production report summarizes the manufacturing activity in a process
department for a period of time. Both reports provide unit cost information, although
the production report only provides the unit cost for a given process. Only the last
process provides the total cost per unit. A similar observation can be made about
the detail concerning materials and conversion costs. The job cost sheet acts as a
subsidiary work-in-process account. The production report also provides the cost
of ending work in process for each process. The sum of these amounts will give the
total work in process—so the production report serves a similar information function.
Thus, the purpose and content of the reports are very similar.
P 6-59
1. Units to account for:
Units in beginning work in process (60% complete)…………. 40,000
Units started during the period………………..…………………… 120,000
Total units to account for……………………..………………… 160,000
Units accounted for:
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed……………………..…………………… 80,000
From beginning work in process………..……………………… 40,000 120,000
Units in ending work in process (60% complete)…………..…… 40,000
Total units accounted for………………………….…..………… 160,000
2. Units completed…………………………………………..……………… 120,000
Add: Units in EWIP × Fraction complete
(40,000 × 0.60)…..……………………………………………………… 24,000
Equivalent units of output………………………………..…………… 144,000
3. Unit Cost [($144,000 + $604,800)/144,000] = $5.20
6-22
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-59 (Concluded)
4. First, calculate the cost per unit for the equivalent units in beginning
inventory (0.60 × 40,000 = 24,000 equivalent units in BWIP) = 24,000
Prior-Period Unit Cost = $144,000/24,000…………………………………………… $6.00
Next, calculate the current-period (FIFO) cost per unit:
= Weighted Average Equivalent
Units – Prior-Period
Equivalent Units
= 144,000 – 24,000
= 120,000
FIFO Unit Cost = $604,800/120,000 = $5.04
The weighted average unit cost
= (24,000/144,000)$6 + (120,000/144,000)$5.04
= $5.20
P 6-60
Physical flow:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP……… 40,000 Units completed……………… 120,000
Units started…………………… 120,000 Units in ending WIP………… 40,000
Total units to acct. for…… 160,000 Total units acct’d. for…… 160,000
Equivalent units:
Units completed……………… 120,000
Units in ending WIP………… 24,000
Total equivalent units…… 144,000
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP…………………………..………………………………… $144,000
Costs added by department………………………..……………………………… 604,800
Total costs to account for…………………………..………………………… $748,800
Cost per equivalent unit…………………………..…………………………………… $5.20
FIFO Equivalent Units for Materials
COST INFORMATION
Alfombra Inc.
Production Report
For the Month of August
(Weighted Average Method)
UNIT INFORMATION
Throw Rug Department
6-23
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-60 (Concluded)
Transferred
Costs accounted for: Out Total
Goods transferred out
($5.20 × 120,000)……………… $624,000 $624,000
Goods in ending WIP:
Conversion ($5.20 × 24,000)…… $124,800 124,800
Total costs accounted for… $624,000 $124,800 $748,800
P 6-61
1. Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP……… 15,000 Transferred out……… 45,000
Units started*………………… 35,000 Units in ending WIP… 5,000
Total…………………………… 50,000 Total………………… 50,000
*50,000 – 15,000 = 35,000
2. Equivalent
Units
Transferred out………………………………………..…………………………… 45,000
Ending WIP (5,000 × 0.25)…………..…………………………………………… 1,250
Total………………………………………………………………..……………… 46,250
3. Unit cost [($1,656 + $26,094)/46,250]……..…………………………………… $0.60
4. Cost transferred out (45,000 × $0.60)………………………..………………… $27,000
Cost of ending WIP (1,250 × $0.60)……………………………………………… $750
5. To assign costs to spoiled units, they should appear as an item in the
equivalent units schedule:
Equivalent
Units
Transferred out…………………………………………………..………………… 42,500
Spoiled units…………………………………………………………..…………… 2,500
Ending WIP (5,000 × 0.25)…………..…………………………………………… 1,250
Total………………………………………………………………………..……… 46,250
Work in Process
Ending
6-24
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-61 (Concluded)
The cost per equivalent unit is the same calculated without spoilage.
Spoilage Cost = 2,500 × $0.60 = $1,500
If the spoilage cost is abnormal, then it will not be assigned to production. A
common approach is to treat the $1,500 as a loss for the period. If the spoilage
is normal, then it would be added to the cost of goods transferred out.
P 6-62
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP……… 24,000 Units completed……………… 70,000
Units started…………………… 56,000 Units in ending WIP………… 10,000
Total units to acct. for…… 80,000 Total units acct’d. for …… 80,000
Equivalent units:
Units completed………………………………………………………………………… 70,000
Units in ending WIP (10,000 × 0.70)………………………………………………… 7,000
Total equivalent units……………………………………………………………… 77,000
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP………………………..……………………………………… $285,520
Costs added by department…………………..……………………………………… 638,480
Total costs to account for………………………………………………………… $924,000
Cost per equivalent unit ($924,000/77,000)……..……………………………………… $12.00
Costs accounted for:
Goods transferred out (70,000 × $12.00)………..………………………………… $840,000
Ending WIP (7,000 × $12.00)……..…………………………………………………… 84,000
Total costs accounted for……………………………………..………………… $924,000
COST INFORMATION
Millie Company
Assembly Department
For the Month of June
(Weighted Average Method)
UNIT INFORMATION
Production Report
6-25
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-63
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in beginning WIP…….. 24,000 Started and completed…… 46,000
Units started……..…………… 56,000 From beginning WIP……… 24,000
From ending WIP…………… 10,000
Total units to acct. for…… 80,000 Total units acct’d for…… 80,000
Equivalent units:
Started and completed……………………………………………………………… 46,000
To complete beginning WIP (24,000 × 0.40)……………………………………… 9,600
Units in ending WIP (10,000 × 0.70)……………………………………………… 7,000
Total equivalent units…………………………………………………………… 62,600
Costs to account for:
Costs in beginning WIP…………………………..………………………………… $285,520
Costs added by department……………………..………………………………… 638,480
Total costs to account for……………………..………………………………… $924,000
Cost per equivalent unit ($638,480/62,600)……………………………………..…… $10.1994
Costs accounted for:
Transferred out:
Units started and completed (46,000 × $10.1994)…………………………… $469,172
Units in beginning WIP:
From prior period………………………………………..…………………… 285,520
From current period (9,600 × $10.1994)…………………..……………… 97,914
Total cost transferred out………………………………………………… $852,606
Goods in ending work in process (7,000 × $10.1994)………………………… 71,396
Total costs accounted for……………………………………………………… $924,002
* Rounded
UNIT INFORMATION
COST INFORMATION
Millie Company
(FIFO Method)
Assembly Department
Production Report
For the Month of June
*
6-26
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-64
1. a. Physical flow schedule:
Units to account for: Units accounted for:
Units in BWIP……… 30,000 Units completed………… 480,000
Units started……… 500,000 From EWIP……………… 50,000
Total units……… 530,000 Total units…………… 530,000
b. Equivalent unit schedule:
Units completed………………………………..……………………………… 480,000
Units in ending WIP (50,000 × 0.40)…..…………………………………..… 20,000
Total equivalent units…………..………………………………………… 500,000
2. Unit cost computation:
Costs in BWIP………………..……………………………………………………… $ 270,000
Costs added……………..…………………………………………………………… 11,342,500
Total costs……………..………………………………………………………… $11,612,500
Unit Cost = $11,612,500/500,000…………..……………………………………… $23.225
3. Ending work in process (20,000 × $23.225)…………………………………… $464,500
Goods transferred out (480,000 × $23.225)……..…..………………………… $11,148,000
4. Cost reconciliation:
Costs to account for: Costs accounted for:
Beginning WIP…..……… $ 270,000 Transferred out…..…… $11,148,000
August costs…..……… 11,342,500 Ending WIP…..………… 464,500
Total to acct. for….. $11,612,500 Total to acct. for…..… $11,612,500
5. Equivalent unit schedule: Paraffin Pigment
Units completed………………..………………………………… 480,000 480,000
Units in ending WIP……………………..……………………… 20,000 20,000
Total equivalent units……………………..………………… 500,000 500,000
Unit cost computation: Paraffin Pigment
Costs in BWIP…………………………..………………………… $ 120,000 $ 100,000
Costs added……………………………..………………………… 3,250,000 2,550,000
Total costs………….……..…………………………………… $3,370,000 $2,650,000
Unit paraffin cost = $3,370,000/500,000….……………..……………………… $6.74
Unit pigment cost = $2,650,000/500,000………….…..………………………… $5.30
6-27
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-65
1. Department A
a. Physical flow schedule:
Units in beginning WIP…………..………………… 5,000
Units started in November…………..…………… 25,000
Total units to account for………..…………… 30,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Units completed………..…………………………… 28,000
Units in ending WIP……………..………………… 2,000
Total units accounted for……………..……… 30,000
b. Equivalent unit calculation:
Units completed……………..………………………………………… 28,000
Add: Equivalent units in ending WIP (2,000 × 0.80)………..…… 1,600
Total equivalent units……………………………………..……… 29,600
c. Costs charged to the department: Materials Conversion Total
Beginning WIP…………..……………… $10,000 $ 6,900 $ 16,900
Incurred during November…………..… 57,800 95,220 153,020
Total costs…………..………………… $67,800 $102,120 $169,920
Unit cost calculation:
Unit cost = $169,920/29,600………….…..…………………………… $5.7405
d. and e. Cost reconciliation:
Costs to account for:
Beginning WIP…………………………..……………………………… $ 16,900
Costs incurred…………………………………..……………………… 153,020
Total costs to account for………………..……………………… $169,920
Total costs accounted for:
Goods transferred out (28,000 × $5.7405)……..…..……………… $160,734
Costs in ending WIP (1,600 × $5.74)…………..…………………… 9,185
Total costs accounted for*…………………..…………………… $169,919
* Rounded
2.
Credit
Work in Process—Department A
Raw Materials 57,800
Work in Process—Department A
Conversion Costs—Department A 95,220
Work in Process—Department B
Work in Process—Department A 160,734
160,734
57,800
Debit
Journal
95,220
Date Description
*
*
*
6-28
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-65 (Concluded)
Answers may vary, but could (or should) include:
Using a conversion cost control account is more commonly used because direct
labor is becoming a small percentage of total manufacturing costs. Automation is
one cause; changing the nature of direct labor as in JIT is another cause. In
manufacturing cells, direct labor also performs many so-called traditional overhead
activities such as maintenance and inspection—thus, taking on the nature of
“conversion labor.”
P 6-66
1. Department A
a. Physical flow schedule:
Units in beginning WIP……………..…………………… 5,000
Units started in November………..…………………… 25,000
Total units to account for…………..……………… 30,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed…..……………………………… 23,000
From beginning WIP………………..…………………… 5,000
Units in ending WIP………………..…………………… 2,000
Total units accounted for…………..……………… 30,000
b. Equivalent unit calculation:
Units started and completed……..……………………………………… 23,000
Equivalent units in beginning WIP [(1 – 0.40) × 5,000]……………… 3,000
Equivalent units in ending WIP (2,000 × 0.80)………………………… 1,600
Total equivalent units…………………..……………………………… 27,600
c. Costs charged to the department: Materials Conversion Total
Beginning WIP…..…………………………… $10,000 $ 6,900 $ 16,900
Incurred during November…..…………… 57,800 95,220 153,020
Total costs…..…………………………… $67,800 $102,120 $169,920
Unit cost calculation:
Unit Cost = $153,020/27,600……………..…………………………………… $5.544
6-29
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-66 (Concluded)
d. and e. Cost reconciliation:
Costs of unit started and completed (23,000 × $5.544)……………… $127,512
Costs of unit in beginning WIP:
Prior period costs………………..……………………………………… 16,900
Current cost to finish units (3,000 × $5.54)………….………..……… 16,632
Total cost of units transferred out……..………………………… $161,044
Costs in ending WIP (1,600 × $5.54)…………………………………….. 8,870
Total costs accounted for*…………..………………………………… $169,914
Costs to account for:
Beginning WIP………………………..…………………………………… $ 16,900
Costs incurred………………………..…………………………………… 153,020
Total costs to account for……………..…………………………… $169,920
* Difference due to rounding.
2.
Debit Credit
Work in Process—Department A
Raw Materials 57,800
Work in Process—Department A
Conversion Costs—Department A 95,220
Work in Process—Department B
Work in Process—Department A 161,044
Because conversion costs are not broken into labor and overhead components,
a control account for conversion costs is used. Some firms are now combining
overhead and direct labor costs into one category. This practice is developing
because direct labor is becoming a small percentage of total manufacturing costs.
95,220
161,044
Journal
Date Description
57,800
6-30
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-67
1.
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP……………………………………………………… 10
Units started…………………………………………………………………… 150
Total units to account for………………………………………………… 160
Physical Equivalent
Units accounted for: Flow Units
Units completed…………………………………………… 140 140
Units in ending WIP ……………………………………… 20 10
Total units accounted for……………………………… 160 150
Costs to account for: Materials Conversion* Total
Beginning WIP……………………………… $ 252 $ 846 $ 1,098
Incurred during March……………………… 3,636 13,854 17,490
Total costs to account for……………… $3,888 $14,700 $18,588
Equivalent units…………………………………………………………………… 150
Cost per equivalent unit………………………………………………………… $123.92
* Conversion is labor plus overhead (200% of labor):
BWIP: $282 + ($282 × 2.00) = $846
March: $4,618 + ($4,618 × 2.00) = $13,854
Transferred Ending Work
Costs accounted for: Out Total
Goods transferred out
(140 × $123.92)…………………………… $17,349 — $17,349
Ending WIP (10 × $123.92)………………… $1,239 1,239
Total costs accounted for……………… $17,349 $1,239 $18,588
in Process
Benson Pharmaceuticals
Mixing Department
For the Month of March
(Weighted Average Method)
UNIT INFORMATION
COST INFORMATION
Production Report
6-31
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-67 (Continued)
2.
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP…………………………………………………………… 4,000
Units started………………………………………………………………………… 210,000
Total units to account for …………………………………………………… 214,000
Units accounted for: Flow Trans. In Materials Conversion
Units completed………………… 208,000 208,000 208,000 208,000
Units in ending WIP*…………… 6,000 6,000 6,000 2,400
Total units accounted for…… 214,000 214,000 214,000 210,400
* 6,000 × 0.40
Costs to account for: Trans. In Materials Total
Beginning WIP…………………… $ 140 $ 32 $ 50 $ 222
Incurred during March………… 17,349 1,573 4,860 23,782
Total costs to account for… $17,489 $1,605 $4,910 $24,004
Equivalent units………………… 214,000 214,000 210,400
Cost per equivalent unit……… $0.0817 $0.0075 $0.0233 $0.1125
** BWIP: $20 + ($20 × 1.50) = $50
March: $1,944 + ($1,944 × 1.50) = $4,860
Costs accounted for: Total
Goods transferred out
(208,000 × $0.1125)……………………………… $23,400 $23,400
Ending WIP transferred in
(6,000 × $0.0817)………………………………… 490
Materials (6,000 × $0.0075)……………………… 45
Conversion (2,400 × $0.0233)…………………… 56
Total costs accounted for…………………… $23,400 $23,991
*** Difference due to rounding.
Benson Pharmaceuticals
Encapsulating Department
For the Month of March
(Weighted Average Method)
Production Report
UNIT INFORMATION
56
45
$591
Equivalent Units
Physical
Conversion
Out
Transferred Ending Work
in Process
$490
COST INFORMATION
***
**
6-32
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-67 (Concluded)
3. Weighted average is easier to use than FIFO because it does not require separate
tracking for units in BWIP. FIFO requires that prior-period work and costs be
accounted for separately. The weighted average method commingles prior-period
work and costs with current-period work and costs, thus making the computations
much easier. The weighted average method will produce essentially the same results
as the FIFO method if the cost of inputs remains relatively unchanged from one
period to the next. If there are significant changes in costs, then the unit cost of the
two periods can be significantly different. Of course, if BWIP is very small, then the
difference in using weighted average as opposed to FIFO will be immaterial.
6-33
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-68
1.
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP……………… 10
Units started…………………………… 150
Total units to account for………… 160
Units accounted for:
Units started and completed………… 130 130
Units in BWIP (to complete)………… 10 6
Units in EWIP………………………… 20 10
Total units accounted for………… 160 146
* 10 × 0.60 = 6
** 20 × 0.50 = 10
Costs to account for: Total
Beginning WIP…………………………… $ 1,098
Incurred during March…………………… 17,490
Total costs to account for……………… $18,588
Equivalent units………………………………………………………………… 146
Cost per equivalent unit………………………………………………………… $119.7945
*** BWIP: $282 + ($282 × 2.00) = $846
March: $4,618 + ($4,618 × 2.00) = $13,854
Costs accounted for: Total
Units started and completed
(130 × $119.7945)……………………… — $15,573
Units in beginning WIP:
From prior period……………………… — 1,098
From current period
(6 × $119.7945)……………………… — 719
Ending work in process
(10 × $119.7945)……………………… $1,198 1,198
Total costs accounted for……… $1,198 $18,588
in Process
Benson Pharmaceuticals
Mixing Department
(FIFO Method)
COST INFORMATION
UNIT INFORMATION
For the Month of March
Physical
Flow
Transferred
Production Report
$17,390
Equivalent
Units
Ending Work
Conversion
$ 846
13,854
$14,700
Materials
$15,573
1,098
719
Out
$ 252
3,636
$3,888
***
*
**
6-34
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
P 6-68 (Concluded)
2.
Units to account for:
Units in beginning WIP…………… 4,000
Units started………………………… 210,000
Total units to account for…… 214,000
Physical
Units accounted for: Flow Trans. In Materials Conversion
Units started and completed………… 204,000 204,000 204,000 204,000
Units in BWIP (to complete)………… 4,000 — — 2,000
Units in EWIP…………………………… 6,000 6,000 6,000 2,400
Total units accounted for………… 214,000 210,000 210,000 208,400
Costs to account for: Trans. In Materials Total
Beginning WIP………………………… $ 140 $ 32 $ 50 $ 222
Incurred during March………………… 17,390 1,573 4,860 23,823
Total costs to account for………… $17,530 $1,605 $4,910 $24,045
Equivalent units……………………… 210,000 210,000 208,400
Cost per equivalent unit***…………… $0.0828 $0.0075 $0.0233 $0.1136
* BWIP: $20 + ($20 × 1.50) = $50
** March: $1,944 + ($1,944 × 1.50) = $4,860
*** The numbers are rounded and the unit costs are calculated using only costs for March
because FIFO is being used.
Ending
Costs accounted for: Work in Process Total
Units started and completed
(204,000 × $0.1136)………………… $23,174 — $23,174
Units in BWIP from prior period 222 — 222
Current period (2,000 × $0.0233)…… 47 — 47
Ending WIP:
Transferred In (6,000 × $0.0828)… — $497 497
Materials (6,000 × $0.0075)……… — 45 45
Conversion (2,400 × $0.0233)…… — 56 56
Total costs accounted for*…… $23,443 $598 $24,041
*Difference due to rounding.
Transferred
Out
Conversion
COST INFORMATION
Equivalent Units
Benson Pharmaceuticals
UNIT INFORMATION
Encapsulating Department
(FIFO Method)
For the Month of March
Production Report
*
**
6-35
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-69
1. Unit cost computation:
Physical flow schedule:
Units, beginning work in process…………………………………………… 0
Units started…………………………………………………………………… 2,800
Total units to account for………………………………………………… 2,800
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed………………………………………………………… 2,500
From beginning work in process…………………………………………… 0
Units, ending work in process……………………………………………… 300
Total units accounted for………………………………………………… 2,800
Direct Conversion
Costs charged to the department: Materials Cost Total
Costs in BWIP………………………………… $ 0 $ 0 $ 0
Costs added by department*……………… 114,000 82,201 196,201
Total costs………………………………… $114,000 $82,201 $196,201
* $45,667 + (0.80 × $45,667)
Direct Conversion
Equivalent units calculation: Materials Cost
Units completed………………………………………………… 2,500 2,500
Equivalent units in ending work in process……………… 300 240
Total equivalent units……………………………………… 2,800 2,740
Unit cost calculation:
Unit Cost = Unit Direct Materials Cost + Unit Conversion Costs
Direct material cost**………………………………………………………… $40.71
Unit conversion cost………………………………………………………… 30.00
Total unit cost……………………………………………………………… $70.71
** Rounded
2. Since conversion activity is the same for both bows, only the materials cost will
differ. Thus, the unit materials cost is computed and then added to the unit
conversion cost obtained in Requirement 1.
Econo Model
Physical flow schedule:
Units, beginning work in process…………………………………………… 0
Units started…………………………………………………………………… 1,600
Total units to account for………………………………………………… 1,600
CASES
6-36
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-69 (Continued)
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed…………………..……………………………………… 1,500
From beginning work in process………..……………………………………… 0
Units, ending work in process…………..……………………………………… 100
Total units accounted for………………..…………………………………… 1,600
Direct materials cost charged to the department: Direct
Materials
Costs in beginning work in process……..……………………………………… $ 0
Costs added by department………………..……………………………………… 30,000
Total costs…………………………………..……………………………………… $30,000
Equivalent units calculation: Direct
Materials
Units completed……………………………..………………………………………… 1,500
Add: Equivalent units in ending work in process…………..………………… 100
Total equivalent units…………………………………………..………………… 1,600
Unit cost calculation:
Unit Cost = Unit Direct Materials Cost + Unit Conversion Costs
Direct material cost per unit………………………………..……………………… $18.75
Unit conversion cost…………………………………………..……………………… 30.00
Total unit cost………………………………………………..…………………… $48.75
Deluxe Model
Physical flow schedule:
Units, beginning work in process…………………………..………………… 0
Units started…………………………………………………..…………………… 1,200
Total units to account for…………………………………..………………… 1,200
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed……………………………………..…………………… 1,000
From beginning work in process…………………………..…………………… 0
Units, ending work in process……………………………..…………………… 200
Total units accounted for…………………………………..………………… 1,200
Direct materials cost charged to the department: Direct
Materials
Costs in beginning work in process……………………..……………………… $ 0
Costs added by department……………………………..………………………… 84,000
Total costs…………………………………………………..……………………… $84,000
6-37
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-69 (Concluded)
Equivalent units calculation: Direct
Materials
Units completed………..…………………………………………………………… 1,000
Add: Equivalent units in ending work in process………..…………………… 200
Total equivalent units……………………………………..………………… 1,200
Unit cost calculation:
Unit Cost = Unit Direct Materials Cost + Unit Conversion Costs
Direct material cost per unit …………………………………..……………………… $ 70
Unit conversion cost…………………………………………..……………………… 30
Total unit cost…………………………………………………..…………………… $100
3. Unit cost for Econo model……………………………..……………………………… $ 48.75
Unit cost for Deluxe model…………………………..……………………………… 100.00
Unit cost for both together……………………………..……………………………… $148.75
Using pure process costing understates the cost of the Deluxe model and overstates
the cost of the Econo model.The error is large, so Karen seems to be justified in her
belief that a pure process-costing relationship is not appropriate.
Process costing could be used for all departments other than the pattern department.
The pattern procedures can be used for conversion costs, but the cost of direct
materials should be tracked by batch.
4. The profitability of the Econo line was being understated by nearly $22, while that of
the Deluxe line was overstated by over $29 producing an erroneous $51 difference
in profitability under the current process-costing system. This easily could be enough
difference to make the marketing manager’s request for additional advertising dollars
a sound one. It is quite possible that Aaron was wrong in not granting the request—
wrong because he was using the wrong cost information. This example illustrates
the importance of an accurate costing system.
6-38
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-70
1. Physical flow schedule:
Units, beginning work in process……………………………………………… 10,000
Units started (transferred in)…………………..………………………………… 51,000
Total units to account for……………………..…………………………… 61,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed………………………..………………………………… 40,000
From beginning work in process……………..………………………………… 10,000
Units, ending work in process………………..………………………………… 11,000
Total units accounted for………………………..…………………………… 61,000
Costs:
Costs incurred by the gating department:
Direct materials (0.23 × $378,000)…………………………………………… $ 86,940
Direct labor (0.35 × $530,300)……………………………………………… 185,605
Overhead (0.35 × $643,518)………………………………………………… 225,231
Total costs added……………………………………………….………… $497,776
*Assumes that overhead is used in the same proportion as direct labor
Direct Conversion
Equivalent units calculation: Materials Costs
Units started and completed……………………………………… 4 0,000 40,000
Units completed from beginning work in process…………… 4,000
Add: Equivalent units in ending work in process…………… 1 1,000 6,600
Total equivalent units……………………………………….…… 51,000 50,600
Unit cost calculation:
Unit Cost = Unit Direct Materials Cost + Unit Conversion Costs
Direct material cost per unit……………………………………..………………… $1.70
Unit conversion cost*……………………………………………..………………… 8.12
Total unit cost……………………………………………………..……………… $9.82
*Rounded
Value of ending work in process:
Direct materials (11,000 × $1.70)…..…………..……………………………… $18,700
Conversion costs (6,600 × $8.12)…..…………..……………………………… 53,592
Total cost of units in ending work in process………………..………… $72,292
Assumptions: Overhead is used at the same rate as direct labor.
The FIFO method is used because the costs associated with the beginning work in
process are not known. Only the manufacturing costs added this period (20X1) are
known. Since the FIFO method requires only current output and current costs to
calculate the unit cost, it is the method that should be used. Once a cost per
equivalent unit is known, the ending work in process can be valued.
6-39
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-70 (Continued)
2. Units, beginning work in process…………………..……………………………… 8,000
Units started (transferred in)………………………………………………………… 50,000
Total units to account for………………………………………………………… 58,000
Units completed and transferred out:
Started and completed…………………………………………………………… 42,000
From beginning work in process………………………………………………… 8,000
Units, ending work in process…………………………………………………… 8,000
Total units accounted for……………………………………………………… 58,000
Direct Conversion Transferred
Equivalent units calculation: Materials Costs In
Units started and completed…..…………………… 42,000 42,000 42,000
Units to complete, beginning
work in process…..………………………………… 0 6,400 0
Add: Equivalent units in ending
work in process…..………………………… 8,000 2,400 8,000
Total equivalent units…..…………………………… 50,000 50,800 50,000
Costs:
Transferred-in cost (50,000 × $9.82)*…………………………… $491,000
Costs incurred by shell creating:
Direct materials ($378,000 × 0.47)…………………………… $177,660
Direct labor ($530,300 × 0.15)………………………………… 79,545
Overhead ($643,518 × 0.15)…………………………………… 96,528
Total conversion cost……………………………………… 353,733
Total costs…………………………………………………………… $844,733
* Assumes that all units transferred out, including those finished from beginning work in process, have
a cost of $9.82 per unit. In essence, this assumes that the unit cost of this period equals the unit cost
of the prior period.
Unit Cost = Unit Direct Materials Cost + Unit Conversion Costs + Unit Tranferred-In
Cost
Unit direct materials cost* …………………………………………………………… $ 3.55
Unit conversion costs* ……………………………………………………………… 3.47
Unit transferred-in cost……………………………………………………………… 9.82
$16.84
Units, ending work in process:*
Direct materials (8,000 × $3.55)…………………………………………………… $ 28,400
Conversion costs (2,400 × $3.47)………………………………………………… 8,328
Transferred in (8,000 × $9.82)…………………………………………………… 78,560
Total cost of ending work in process……………………………………… $115,288
*Rounded
6-40
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.
CHAPTER 6 Process Costing
Case 6-70 (Concluded)
In addition to the same assumptions made for the first department, we had to assume
that the unit cost of all units transferred out was equal to the FIFO method unit cost.
This assumption holds if the cost of producing last period did not change for this
period. Even if the cost did change, the error is not likely to be large. For purposes
of estimating the value of ending work in process, the assumption is quite workable.
Case 6-71
1. Gary’s proposal requires Donna to falsify the equivalent unit calculation so that
income and assets can be inflated and reported incorrectly. Falsification of the
production report would be a violation of at least two major ethical standards:
integrity and credibility. If Donna agrees to the proposal, she would be taking action
that would discredit her profession. In addition, Donna has an ethical obligation
to communicate information fairly and objectively, disclosing all information that
would be needed for the loan officer to fairly assess the merits of the company’s
request for a loan. Clearly, Donna should not agree to falsify the production report.
2. Donna has an obligation to report Gary to a superior only if an actual ethical problem
exists. If Gary decides that the course of action he is suggesting is not really in his or
the company’s best interests, then no ethical problem exists and no action by Donna
is needed.
3. If Gary insists on his idea of falsification of the division’s reports, Donna should
attempt to resolve the conflict by appealing to Gary’s immediate supervisor (and on
up, if necessary and with the immediate supervisor’s knowledge, assuming he or
she is not involved) until a satisfactory resolution is achieved. If no satisfactory
resolution is possible, then Donna should consult her own attorney as to legal
obligations and rights concerning the ethical conflict. She may also clarify the
ethical issues by initiating a confidential discussion with an IMA Ethics Counselor.
4. In this situation, the ethical dilemma is complicated by two factors: Donna’s age
and a low likelihood of resolution by appealing to higher-level authorities. Donna’s
age may make it more difficult to find alternative employment (at least at the same
level and pay), and it may mean possible forfeiture of retirement benefits. Seeking
help from an expert in ethics and consulting a lawyer are certainly good
recommendations. Donna has the option of fighting back, and at her age (with
retirement benefits at stake), a good offense may be her best defense.
6-41
© 2018 Cengage Learning. All Rights Reserved. May not be scanned, copied or duplicated, or posted to a publicly accessible website, in whole or in part.

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"

Assignment 4: Individual Telehealth Presentation

Assignment 4: Individual Telehealth Presentation

Topic: Communication and technology in healthcare

Telehealth and technology overall are becoming more commonplace in healthcare environments. Being able to communicate through distance communication tools is a valuable skill to display in a healthcare environment. For this assignment, you are required to deliver a minimum 10-minute presentation on a healthcare topic of your choice. The presentation will be delivered to your instructor through a distance-oriented tool called Zoom. Your instructor will email you the link prior to the presentation to connect on a designated day and time. Here are the steps you will need to take:

 

  1. Select a topic you would like to present (based on the week 1 outline)

 

The presentation will cover a related topic to the healthcare field. You can discuss this with your instructor. Some suggestions are:

  • Universal health care
  • Mandated reporting
  • Nurse education
  • House calls
  • Health care cost reduction
  • Triage procedures
  • Other topics are welcome and open for discussion with your instructor

Here is a website with topics related to health care: https://www.healthcare.gov/topics/

 

Here are some suggested videos about telehealth:

 

Telemedicine in the age of COVID-19

 

Telehealth Expanding Access to Care

 

Telehealth: How new technologies are transforming healthcare 

 

 

This was week 1 you helped me with…..

Health Care Communication

Gasiorek, J., & Van de Poel, K. (2018). Language-specific skills in intercultural healthcare communication: Comparing perceived preparedness and skills in nurses’ first and second languages. Nurse education today, 61, 54-59.

The authors focused on the need to have competence in more than one language, especially for health care workers. They need to gain skills in using several languages, given that the patient populations continue to get diverse with time. It is through such skills that they will manage to communicate effectively with different populations, and their service delivery will be efficient. The article is helpful because it shows that communication entails the comprehension of multiple languages.

Jennings, W., Bond, C., & Hill, P. S. (2018). The power of talk and power in talk: a systematic review of Indigenous narratives of culturally safe healthcare communication. Australian Journal of Primary Health, 24(2), 109-115.

The article addresses the role of health care communication from a cultural perspective. The authors noted that health care professionals serve people from different cultures and races, hence the need to have good communication skills that meet the cultural aspect of the people being served. Culturally safe communication is essential in addressing people from different cultures. The article is helpful because it sheds more light on the role of health care communication across cultures globally.

Majeed, F., Asif, M. W., Hassan, M. A., Abbas, S. A., & Lali, M. I. (2019). Social media news classification in healthcare communication. Journal of Medical Imaging and Health Informatics, 9(6), 1215-1223.

In this article, the authors noted the emerging trend of using social media to communicate health care information. Most of the information regarding health issues is now available on social media sites, and as many patients as possible can access it. Health care organizations use the data to make decisions. Social media communication is effective due to ease of access and lower costs. The article will help in researching about means of communicating health information.

Nemeth, C. P., Kowalsky, J., Brandwijk, M., Kahana, M., Klock, P. A., & Cook, R. I. (2017). Between shifts: healthcare communication in the PICU. In Improving Healthcare Team Communication (pp. 135-153). CRC Press.

In this article, the authors focus on the role of communication in improving the health of pediatric patients. They noted that the speed of administering care by the health care professionals and the quality of that care determines the safety of the patients. Therefore, there is a need to make effective and timely communication to ensure that the patients receive timely attention. The article is helpful in showing the essence of communication in pediatric care.

Tsoh, J. Y., Sentell, T., Gildengorin, G., Le, G. M., Chan, E., Fung, L. C., & Burke, A. (2016). Healthcare communication barriers and self-rated health in older Chinese American immigrants. Journal of community health, 41(4), 741-752.

In this article, the authors acknowledged that health care communication has some barriers which affect the patient outcome. They inform the readers that when these barriers exist and nothing is done to address them, there are chances that service delivery will be ineffective. The article is useful in addressing the possible communication hindrances, and opening the professionals’ eyes to see the possible remedies to deal with the barriers. Doing so boosts the dissemination of healthcare information.

Topic: Communication and Technology in Health Care

Introduction

Technology has become an essential component of modern communication in health care. Give n the sensitivity of health issues; it is imperative to keep communication at its best. Patients require information from health care providers in a way that they can understand, hence the need for effective communication.

  1. Forms of technology used in health care
  2. Telehealth- entails the dissemination of services to patients through electronic media. It enables medical officers and patients to communicate with each other without requiring the patients to visit the hospital physically. It helps patients to save time and costs associated with hospital visits.
  3. Role of telehealth in health care
  • Helps to boost patient engagement with little monitoring
  • It enables patients to receive quality health care.
  • It facilitates the delivery of health care services to patients who are far.
  • It eliminates long queues in hospital facilities, which patients make if they visit there physically.
  • It increases the number of patients that a health care professional can serve at a given time. Telehealth is faster, it reduces service time, and therefore more patients can be served per unit time.
  • Telehealth increases the efficiency of services delivered to the patients. The professionals do not need to move from one point to the other, and that helps them to be more efficient.
  • Hospitals in remote areas can give emergence care services to their patients. Due to reduced ease of access, health workers can use this technology to address the needs of patients at the right time. They do not need to travel and meet the patients at their places of residence.
  • Through telehealth, it is possible for remote hospitals to provide intensive care services to needy patients.
  • Conclusion

 

What Students Are Saying About Us

.......... Customer ID: 12*** | Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"Honestly, I was afraid to send my paper to you, but splendidwritings.com proved they are a trustworthy service. My essay was done in less than a day, and I received a brilliant piece. I didn’t even believe it was my essay at first 🙂 Great job, thank you!"

.......... Customer ID: 14***| Rating: ⭐⭐⭐⭐⭐
"The company has some nice prices and good content. I ordered a term paper here and got a very good one. I'll keep ordering from this website."

"Order a Custom Paper on Similar Assignment! No Plagiarism! Enjoy 20% Discount"